Journey
OWNER’S MANUAL
2019
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2018 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................3
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS ......................................................7
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................13
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .........................................135
5
SAFETY ........................................................................159
6
STARTINGANDOPERATING.........................................................227
7
INCASEOFEMERGENCY ...........................................................277
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .....................................................311
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................371
10
MULTIMEDIA ....................................................................385
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ............................................................495
12
INDEX..........................................................................501
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured
that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styl-
ing, and high quality. This Owner’s Manual has been
prepared with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with the operation and mainte-
nance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty
Information, and customer oriented documents. In the
attached Warranty Booklet, you will find a description of
the services that FCA offers to its customers, the Warranty
Certificate and the details of the terms and conditions for
maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of
these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for
the first time. Following the instructions, recommenda-
tions, tips, and important warnings in this manual will
help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particu-
larly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and
transfer case shifting (if equipped). Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will
improve with experience.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle.
Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or
versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore,
you should only consider the information which is related
to the trim level, engine, and version that you have
purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Own-
er’s Information, that may or may not be applicable to your
vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help
you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA aims at
a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this
reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model
described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
NOTE: After reviewing the Owner’s Information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that an authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
4 INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustra-
tions may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose sym-
bols indicate precautions to be observed when using this
component. Refer to “Warning Lights and Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information on the symbols used in your vehicle.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
1
INTRODUCTION 5
FRONT VIEW
Front View
1 — Headlights 4 — Wheels/Tires
2 — Hood/Engine Compartment 5 — Exterior Mirrors
3 — Windshield 6 — Doors
8 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
REAR VIEW
Rear View
1 — Rear Lights
2 — Rear Windshield Wiper
3 — Liftgate
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 9
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls 6 — Switch Panel
2 — Multifunction Lever (Behind Steering Wheel) 7 — Uconnect System
3 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Climate Controls
4 — Speed Controls 9 — Glove Compartment
5 — Ignition
10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTERIOR
Interior
1 — Door Locks 3 — Seats
2 — Window Switches 4 — Gear Selector
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 KEYS .................................17
▫ KeyFob..............................17
䡵 IGNITION SWITCH .......................22
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition ...............22
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message ...........24
䡵 REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .............25
▫ How To Use Remote Start..................25
▫ Remote Start Abort Message ...............25
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode ................26
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle ...............................26
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle ...............................26
▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . .26
▫ General Information .....................27
䡵 SENTRY KEY ...........................27
▫ Key Programming ......................28
▫ Replacement Keys .......................28
▫ General Information .....................28
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .29
▫ To Arm The System ......................29
▫ To Disarm The System ....................29
▫ Rearming Of The System ..................30
▫ Security System Manual Override ............30
▫ Tamper Alert ...........................30
䡵 DOORS ...............................31
▫ Manual Door Locks ......................31
▫ Power Door Locks ......................32
3
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
(If Equipped) ..........................33
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors ............................37
䡵 SEATS ................................39
▫ Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) ............39
▫ Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ............42
▫ Power Adjustment (Front Seat) .............48
▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped ...........50
▫ Seatback/Armrest — Second Row Passenger
Seat .................................51
䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS ......................52
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) —
Front Seats ............................52
▫ Rear Head Restraint Adjustment .............55
▫ Rear Head Restraint Removal ..............55
䡵 STEERING WHEEL .......................56
▫ Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ............56
▫ Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped.........57
䡵 MIRRORS ..............................58
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped ......58
▫ Electrochromic Mirror — If Equipped .........58
▫ Outside Mirrors ........................59
▫ Interior Observation Mirror ................60
▫ Power Mirrors .........................61
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .............61
▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped.........62
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped .....63
䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS .......................63
▫ Multifunction Lever .....................63
▫ Headlights ............................64
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) .............64
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ..................64
▫ Flash-To-Pass ..........................64
▫ Automatic Headlights ....................64
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) ...............65
▫ Headlight Time Delay ....................65
▫ Lights-On Reminder......................65
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped .................66
▫ Turn Signals ...........................66
▫ Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ..........66
䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS .......................67
▫ Courtesy/Interior Lighting ................67
䡵 WIPERS AND WASHERS ...................68
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation................69
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...............71
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS .....................73
▫ Manual Climate Control Overview ...........73
▫ Automatic Climate Controls Overview ........86
▫ Climate Control Functions .................98
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped .............................99
▫ Operating Tips .........................99
䡵 WINDOWS ............................102
▫ Power Windows .......................102
▫ Wind Buffeting ........................104
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .........105
▫ Opening Sunroof .......................106
▫ Closing Sunroof ........................106
▫ Wind Buffeting ........................106
▫ Sunshade Operation .....................106
▫ Anti Pinch Protect Feature ................107
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ....................107
▫ Ignition Off Operation ...................107
䡵 HOOD ...............................107
▫ Opening .............................107
▫ Closing ..............................108
䡵 LIFTGA
TE .............................109
▫ Opening .............................109
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
▫ Cargo Area Features ....................110
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED ....113
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink .....114
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .......117
▫ Using HomeLink .......................118
▫ Security..............................118
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ....................118
▫ General Information .....................119
䡵 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ..................120
▫ Storage ..............................120
▫ Cupholders ..........................124
▫ Power Outlets .........................126
▫ Power Inverter — If Equipped .............130
▫ Sunglasses Storage .....................131
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ......131
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
Key Fob
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition
system consists of a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) and a START/STOP push button ignition system.
The Remote Keyless Entry system consists of a key fob and
Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if equipped.
NOTE: The key fob may not be found if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these
devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal.
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) key fob and an emer-
gency key, which stores in the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. The
emergency key is also for locking the glove compartment.
You can keep the emergency key with you when valet
parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the key fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
The Remote Keyless Entry system allows you to lock or
unlock the doors, open the liftgate, or activate the Panic
Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held key fob with key fob. The key fob does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 MPH (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all key fob buttons
for all key fobs.
Emergency Key Removal
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
Backup Starting Method
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted
battery.
In a situation of a low or fully depleted battery, a backup
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the
nose side of the key fob (side opposite of the Emergency
Key) against the ENGINE START/STOP button and push
to operate the ignition switch.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door or twice within five seconds to
unlock all doors and the liftgate.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push of
the unlock button. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
NOTE: If the vehicle is unlocked by a key fob, and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if
equipped, the security alarm will arm.
The turn signal lights will flash twice to acknowledge the
unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will be acti-
vated.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlock Button
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the unlock
button on the key fob. To change the current setting, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
Key Fob
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer
to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in
“Doors” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the key fob. The time for
this feature is programmable, on vehicles equipped,
through Uconnect Settings. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors and liftgate.
The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to
acknowledge the signal. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
located in “Multimedia” for further programmable infor-
mation.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in “Doors”
in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the
doors will lock. The doors will unlock again automatically
if the key is left inside the passenger compartment, other-
wise the doors will stay locked.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are
locked with the key fob. This feature can be turned on or
turned off. To change the current setting, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push the Panic
button on the key fob. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,
and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you
turn it off by either pushing the Panic button a second time
or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or
greater.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic Alarm
is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will
remain on.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the Panic
Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the
system.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your
thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal
during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on
the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an autho-
rized dealer.
NOTE: Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to another ve-
hicle.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Separating Key Fob Case
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
IGNITION SWITCH
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,
ON/RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: If the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite
of the emergency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE
START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition
switch.
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
• The engine is stopped.
• Some electrical devices (e.g. central locking, alarm, etc.)
are still available.
START/STOP Ignition Button
1—OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ACC
• Engine is not started.
• Some electrical devices are available.
ON/RUN
• Driving position.
• All the electrical devices are available.
START
• The engine will start.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Al-
ways remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE: Refer to ⬙Starting The Engine,⬙ in ⬙Starting And
Operating⬙ for further information.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” for further information.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the parking
brake. Always make sure the keyless ignition node is
in the “OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key fobs from vehicle, place the ignition in the OFF
position and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• HAZARD switch off
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle security alarm not active
• Ignition in OFF position
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monox-
ide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message
The following messages will appear in the instrument
cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits
remote start prematurely if equipped with Remote Start:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Open
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The message stays active until the ignition is cycled to the
ON/RUN position.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the remote start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof opera-
tion (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the
Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the igni-
tion must be cycled to the RUN position before you can
repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the remote start button one time or allow
the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable the one time push of the remote start button for two
seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors and
disarm the vehicle security alarm (if equipped). Then, prior
to the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the
ignition START/STOP button.
NOTE: The message “Push Start Button” will appear in the
instrument cluster display until you push the ignition
START/STOP button.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, the driver heated seat
feature will automatically turn on in cold weather. This
feature will stay on through the duration of Remote Start or
until the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
deactivated through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion on Remote Start Comfort System operation.
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does
not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob and a Keyless Push Button
Ignition, and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to
the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. If
an invalid key fob is used to attempt to start and operate
the vehicle, the system will not allow the engine to crank.
If an invalid key fob is used to start the engine, the system
will shut the engine off in two seconds.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, the
vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start the
engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Key Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming
a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors and
liftgate for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go
Start/Stop button for unauthorized operation. While the
vehicle security alarm is armed, interior switches for door
locks are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
vehicle security alarm will provide the following audible
and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the headlights will
turn on, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and
the vehicle security light in the instrument cluster will
flash.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF (refer to
⬙Starting The Engine⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ in the
Owner’s Manual for further information).
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push lock on the interior power door lock switch with
the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for further
information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a
valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passive entry door
handle (if equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for
further information).
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF posi-
tion.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry, push the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
Start/Stop button (requires at least one valid key fob in
the vehicle).
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the
key to the ON position.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the vehicle security
alarm.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm
the vehicle security alarm.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn the horn off
after 3 minutes, turn all of the visual signals off after 15
additional minutes, and then the vehicle security alarm
will rearm itself.
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm/disarm if you
lock/unlock the doors using the manual door lock plunger.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the vehicle security alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
vehicle security alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DOORS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
upward.
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, the
door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the
liftgate.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries or death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Manual Door Lock Knob
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel.
Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate.
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system. Refer to “Key-
less Enter-N-Go” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for
further information.
If you push the power door lock switch, with the ignition
in the ON/RUN or ACC position and any front door is
open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you
from accidentally locking the key fob in the vehicle.
Turning off the ignition or closing the door will allow the
locks to operate. If a door is open, and the ignition is in the
ON/RUN or ACC position, a chime will sound as a
reminder to remove the key fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto
door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Auto Unlock On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in PARK.
4. Any vehicle door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Power Door Lock Switch Location
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry (If Equipped)
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehi-
cle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a feature of
Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and
unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key
fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and
if equipped will arm the security alarm.
• The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle passive
entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device; these devices may
interfere with the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent
the passive entry system from locking/unlocking the
vehicle.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front door handle to
unlock the driver’s door automatically. The interior door
panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s front
door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate automati-
cally.
NOTE: All doors and the liftgate will unlock when the
front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key
Fob In Vehicle:
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition is OFF.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the vehicle is locked
with a door panel switch, key fob button or door handle
button, once all open doors have been closed the vehicle
checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid
Passive Entry key fobs. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry
key fobs is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid
Passive Entry key fobs are detected outside the vehicle, the
Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle
doors and chirps the horn three times (on the third attempt,
ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry key fob can be
locked in the vehicle).
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Enter The Liftgate:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the button underneath the left side of the
accent bar, which is located on the liftgate below the glass,
to lock or unlock the vehicle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handle, push
the door handle lock button to lock all four doors and
liftgate.
Liftgate Unlock/Lock Button Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
• If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect System, the
key protection described in ⬙Preventing Inadvertent
Locking of Passive Entry key fob in Vehicle⬙ remains
active/functional.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob
lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s
interior door panel.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors
To Engage The Child-Protection Door Lock System
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child-
Protection Door Lock system.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or alike) into the
child lock control and rotate it to the lock position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: When the Child-Protection Door lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the outside
door handle even though the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the Child-Protection locks are en-
gaged. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
NOTE:
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the desired position.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the
lock knob up to the unlock position, roll down the
window, and open the door with the outside door
handle.
To Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or alike) into the
child lock control and rotate it to the unlock position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats)
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
Forward/Rearward Adjustment
For models equipped with manual seats, the driver and
passenger seats can be adjusted forward or rearward by
using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the
floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the desired
position has been reached. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or
death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Forward/Rearward Seat Adjustment Bar
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The seat height control lever is located on the outboard side
of the seat. Raise the lever to raise the seat. Lower the lever
to lower the seat. The total seat travel is approximately 2.5
inches (64 mm).
Recliner Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat.
To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, lean
back to the desired position and release the lever. To return
the seatback to its normal upright position, lean forward
and lift the lever. Release the lever once the seatback is in
the upright position.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Seat Height Adjustment Lever
Recline Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
To provide additional storage area, each second-row pas-
senger seat can be folded flat. This allows for extended
cargo space and still maintains some seating room if
needed.
NOTE: Prior to folding the second-row passenger seat,
make sure the front seatback is not in a reclined position.
This will allow the second-row seat to fold easily.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• On seven passenger models, do not allow a passen-
ger to sit in a third row seat with the second row
seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision, the passenger
could slide underneath the seat belt and be seriously
or even fatally injured.
Forward And Rearward Adjustment
The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat. Lift the
lever to move the seat forward or rearward. Release the
lever once the seat is in the desired position. Then, using
body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to
be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dan-
gerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause
you to lose control. The seat belt might not be adjusted
properly and you could be injured. Adjust any seat
only while the vehicle is parked.
Recliner Adjustment
The recline lever is on the outboard side of the seat. To
recline the seatback, lean back, lift the lever, position the
seatback as desired, and then release the lever. To return
the seatback to its normal upright position, lean back, lift
the lever, lean forward, and then release the lever once the
seatback is in the upright position.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
(Continued)
Manual Seat Adjustment
Recline Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Stadium Tip ’n Slide (Easy Entry/Exit Seat) — Seven
Passenger Models
This feature allows passengers to easily enter or exit the
third-row passenger seats from either side of the vehicle.
To Move The Second-Row Passenger Seat Forward
NOTE: Raise the seatback/armrest before moving the seat
to allow for full seat travel.
Move the control lever on the upper outboard side of the
seatback forward. Then, in one fluid motion, the seat
cushion flips upward and the seat moves forward on its
tracks.
Tip ’n Slide Control Lever
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: A hand-grip is molded into the front of each
quarter trim panel near the door opening to assist entry
and exit from the third-row passenger seats.
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the seat in this position,
as it is only intended for entering and exiting the third
row seats. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
To Unfold And Move The Second-Row Passenger Seat
Rearward
Move the seatback rearward until it locks in place and then
continue sliding the seat rearward on its tracks until it
locks in place.
Push the seat cushion downward to lock it in place.
Adjust the seat track position as desired. Using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Tip ’n Slide Seat
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Manual Folding Second Row Seat
To Fold The Seat
1. Locate the control lever on the lower outboard side of
the seat.
2. Place one hand on the seatback and apply a gentle
pressure.
3. Lift the control lever with the other hand, allow the
seatback to move forward slightly, and then release the
lever.
WARNING!
To prevent personal injury or damage to objects, keep
your head, arms, and objects out of the folding path of
the seatback.
4. Gently guide the seatback into the folded position.
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cush-
ion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
To Unfold The Seat
Raise the seatback and lock it in place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Seatback Release
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Folding Third Row Seats
To provide additional storage area, each third-row passen-
ger seatback can be folded flat. This allows for extended
cargo space and still maintains some rear seating room if
needed.
NOTE: Prior to folding the third-row passenger seatback,
make sure the second-row passenger seatback is not in a
reclined position. This will allow the seatback to fold easily.
To Fold The Seatback
Pull the latch release-loop located at the top of the seatback
upward, push the seatback forward slightly, and release
the release-loop. Then, continue to push the seatback
forward. The head restraints will fold automatically as the
seatback moves forward.
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cush-
ion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
Seatback Release
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
To Unfold The Seatback
Grasp the assist strap loop on the seatback and pull it
toward you to raise the seatback. Continue to raise the
seatback until it locks in place. Raise the head restraint to
lock it in place.
The seatback can also be locked in the reclined position. To
do so, pull the latch release-loop located at the top of the
seatback upward, allow the seatback to recline, and release
the release-loop.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
• Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
without having the head restraint unfolded and
locked in place. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury to the passenger in the event
of a collision.
• Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
with the second row seatback(s) folded flat. In a
collision, the passenger could slide underneath the
seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured.
Power Adjustment (Front Seat)
The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat
near the floor. Use this switch to move the seat up, down,
forward, rearward or to tilt the seat.
Assist Strap
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward, and the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the rear of seat switch, the
seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or
rear of the seat switch; the front or rear of the seat cushion
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Power Seat Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
The Power Lumbar switch is located on the outboard side
of the driver’s seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the
lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on the
switch will raise or lower the position of the support.
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated seat button
once to turn the HI
setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the LO setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
Power Lumbar Switch
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automati-
cally switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of
continuous operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting
will turn off automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Seatback/Armrest — Second Row Passenger Seat
The latch release-loop is located at the top of the seatback/
armrest. Pull the release-loop forward to release the latch
and then downward to lower the seatback/armrest.
Seatback/Armrest
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Raise the seatback/armrest and lock it in place when not in
use, or when additional seating area is required.
WARNING!
Keep the latch clean and free of objects and be certain
that the seatback/armrest is locked securely into posi-
tion. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improp-
erly latched seat could cause serious injury.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) —
Front Seats
Supplemental Active Head Restraints are passive, deploy-
able components, and vehicles with this equipment can not
be readily identified by any markings, only through visual
inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be
split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of
the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This
system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of
rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
For comfort, the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.
Adjustment Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified
technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the
head restraints require removal, see your authorized
dealer.
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint,
refer to “Occupant Restraints/Supplemental Active
Head Restraints (AHR)/Resetting Active Head Re-
straints (AHR)” in “Safety” for further information.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active
Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as
loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint
during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning
could cause personal injury if the Active Head Re-
straint is deployed.
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment
The second row seats are equipped with adjustable and
removable head restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull
upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button located on the base of the head
restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
Rear Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment and the
release buttons while pulling upward on the whole assem-
bly and raise it up as far as it can go. To reinstall the
headrest, put the headrest posts into the holes while
pushing the release buttons. Then adjust it to the appro-
priate height.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to
“Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”.
Rear Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or
improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision. The head restraints
should be checked prior to operating the vehicle and
never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping control handle is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel out-
ward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, pull the control handle upward until
fully engaged.
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Handle
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on for an
average of 80 minutes before automatically shutting off.
This time will vary based on environmental temperatures.
The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not
turn on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn
the heating element on.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a second time
to turn the heating element off.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a
remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
NOTE: A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle.
It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the
windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button
with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted left and right
and tilted up and down for various drivers. The mirror
should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear
window.
Electrochromic Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a
twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield.
The mirror installs on the windshield button with a coun-
terclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting.
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view
viewing.
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of
the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give
a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane
next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
side convex mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the passenger side convex mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
• Full forward position
• Full rearward position
• Normal position
Interior Observation Mirror
The convex interior observation mirror provides the driver
and front seat passenger a wide field of view to conve-
niently view passengers sitting in the rear passenger seats.
To use the interior observation mirror, push on the raised
bars on the compartment door and release (the door will
swing downward), then raise the door until it is almost
closed and release. The door will latch in position to use the
interior observation mirror.
NOTE: From the “observation mirror” position, the door
can only be closed.
To return to the full open position, the door must first be
closed and then opened by pushing the latch again to
release.
Observation Mirror
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel.
Models Without Express Window Feature
Push the mirror select button marked L (left) or R (right).
Then, push one of the four arrow buttons to move the
mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
Models With Express Window Feature
Push and release the mirror select button marked L (left) or
R (right). Then, push one of the four arrow buttons to move
the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing. The
selection times out after 30 seconds of inactivity in order to
guard against accidentally changing a mirror position
following an adjustment.
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped).
Refer to “Climate Controls” in this section for further
information.
Power Mirror Switches
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located be-
tween the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, pushing
the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the
normal driving position.
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the folding feature will be disabled.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle speed
is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they will
automatically unfold.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors, fold and unfold them
by pushing the button (this may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light will turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Multifunction Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Headlights
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instru-
ment panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for
parking lights and instrument panel light operation. Rotate
the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
The Daytime Running Lights will turn on the first time the
vehicle is shifted out of PARK, and remain on unless the
parking brake is applied. Upon returning to the PARK
position, the DRLs will turn off. DRLs will turn off when
the ignition is switched off.
NOTE: The daytime running lights can be turned on and
off using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the
headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain
on, until the lever is released.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO
Headlight Switch
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
position. When the system is on, the headlight time delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on
for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the
OFF position. The headlight time delay can be pro-
grammed 0/30/60/90 seconds.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on after
the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in
the AUTO position and programmable feature is set to ON.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit
area.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the head-
lights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins when
the headlight switch is turned off.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
If you turn the headlights, parking lights or ignition switch
ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable using
the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate when the low beam
headlights or parking lights are on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster display flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display and a continuous chime will sound
if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or
left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.
Fog Light Switch
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy/Interior Lighting
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the
OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights were
switched on manually or are on because a door is open.
The Battery Protection also includes the glove compart-
ment light. To restore interior light operation after auto-
matic battery protection is enabled (Lights off), either place
the ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
Front Lights
The overhead console has two courtesy lights. The lights
turn on when a front door, a rear door or the liftgate is
opened. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless
Entry the lights will also turn on when the unlock button
on the key fob is pushed. The courtesy lights also function
as reading lights. Push in on each lens to turn these lights
on while inside the vehicle. Push the lens a second time to
turn each light off. You may adjust the direction of these
lights by pushing the outside ring, which is identified with
four directional arrows.
Rear Dome Light
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control completely
upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights.
The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control
is in this position.
Rotate the dimmer control downward to the last detent (off
position). The interior lights will remain off when the doors
are open.
Courtesy/Reading Light
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Rotating the dimmer control upward with the parking
lights or headlights on will increase the brightness of the
instrument panel lights.
Interior Light Defeat (Off)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to the extreme
bottom (O) off position. The interior lights will remain off
when the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent. This
feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer,
instrument cluster display, and radio when the parking
lights or headlights are on.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located
at the end of the lever. For information on using the rear
window wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Wiper/
Washer” in this section.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper opera-
tion.
NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the “park”
position if you turn OFF the ignition while they are
operating. The wipers will resume operation when you
turn the ignition back ON.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the wind-
shield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in
any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Front Wiper Control
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi-
tions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause
between cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the windshield
wiper/washer control lever to one of the first five detents
to select the desired delay interval.
There are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate
the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every two
seconds to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds be-
tween cycles at vehicle speeds below 10 mph (16 km/h). At
speeds greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay varies
from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum
of approximately 18 seconds between cycles.
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. If
the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay
times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the
second detent.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the
delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for two
or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the
off position, the wipers will operate for two or three wipe
cycles and then turn off.
Front Wiper Control
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Mist Feature
Push the washer knob, located on the end of the multifunc-
tion lever, inward to the first detent to activate a single
wipe cycle to clear the windshield of road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate
until you release the lever.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear window wiper/washer control is located on the
left side of the steering column.
Rotate the switch upward to the first detent position
for rear wiper operation.
Rotate the switch upward past the first detent
position to activate the rear washer. The washer
pump will continue to operate as long as the switch is held.
Upon release, the wiper will cycle three times before
returning to the set position.
Rear Wiper/Washer
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is placed in
the OFF position, the wiper will automatically return to the
“park” position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper
will resume function at whichever position the switch is set
at.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the wind-
shield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in
any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen (if equipped) and on the instrument panel
below the radio.
Manual Climate Control Overview
Radio 4.3 Manual Tri-Zone Temperature Controls
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
Uconnect 3/3 NAV with 8.4–inch display Tri-Zone Manual
Temperature Controls
Manual Temperature Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press the button on the touchscreen to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when
MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again turns the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual
mode and the MAX A/C indicator turns off.
NOTE: The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen
Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen:
For Radio 4.3: use the circle around the blower icon by pressing on the circle spot where you
want the blower setting to be. To increase blower, the circle bar will go clockwise. To
decrease the blower, the circle bar will move counter-clockwise.
For Uconnect 3/3 NAV: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large
blower icon to increase the blower setting. The blower can also be selected by pressing the
blower bar area between the icons.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Icon Description
Temperature Control
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button
on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the face-
plate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on
the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indica-
tor is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front passenger
temperature and rear passenger temperature/mode/blower settings with the driver
temperature/mode/blower settings. Changing the front passenger temperature or rear passen-
ger temperature/mode/blower settings while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
REAR CLIMATE Rear Climate Control Button
Press and release this button to access the rear climate controls. The indicator will illuminate
when the rear climate controls are ON.
Mode Control Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode buttons on the touchscreen to change the airflow dis-
tribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument
panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
Icon Description
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except Defrost. Recirculation may
be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fog-
ging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing
the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Front Defrost Button
The Front Defrost button changes the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illu-
minates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist out-
lets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
OFF Climate Control OFF Button
The Climate Off button or the OFF button turn the Climate Control System off.
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Economy Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to
turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor. Rotate
the temperature control knob to the desired temperature.
Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor
modes.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Controls system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front MTC Panel
The rear MTC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides heated
air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air
through the headliner outlets.
The rear system climate controls on the touchscreen are
located in the Uconnect touch system, located on the
instrument panel.
The Three-Zone climate control system allows for adjust-
ment of the rear climate controls from the front climate
panel.
To change the rear system settings:
• Press the ⬙REAR CLIMATE⬙ button to change control to
rear control mode, Rear display (below) appears. Con-
trol functions now operate rear system.
• To return to Front screen, press the ⬙FRONT CLIMATE⬙
button.
Rear Lock
• Pressing the Rear Lock button on the touchscreen on the
Uconnect touchscreen, illuminates a lock symbol in the
rear display. The rear climate controls are controlled
from the front Uconnect system.
• Rear occupants can only adjust the rear control when the
Rear Temperature Lock button is turned off.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
• The rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC) is located
in the headliner, near the center of the vehicle.
Radio 4.3 Manual Rear Climate Controls
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Manual Rear Climate Controls
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Rear Lock Button
Press and release to lock out the rear manual temperature controls from adjusting the rear tem-
perature and blower settings.
Done Button
For Radio 4.3: Press and release this button to complete any climate changes.
Front Climate Button
For Uconnect 3/3 NAV: Press and release this button to change the display on the Uconnect sys-
tem back to the Front Climate Controls.
Rear Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides front occupants ability to control rear temperature.
For Radio 4.3: Press and hold the slide bar to increase or decrease the temperature.
For Uconnect 3/3 NAV: Press and hold the slide bar to increase or decrease the temperature or
Push the up arrow button on the touchscreen to increase the temperature and Push the down
arrow button on the touchscreen to decrease the temperature.
When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s temperature moves up and down with the
driver’s temperature.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to
manual operation. The speeds can be selected using the buttons on the touchscreen.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
Icon Description
Rear Passenger Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls off.
Mode Control Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode buttons on the touchscreen to change the airflow dis-
tribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument
panel outlets and floor outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Panel Mode. In
Panel Mode, air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard
outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut
off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these out-
lets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Bi-Level Mode. In
Bi-Level Mode, air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Floor Mode. In Floor
Mode, air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indica-
tor is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front passenger
temperature and rear passenger temperature/mode/blower settings with the driver
temperature/mode/blower settings. Changing the front passenger temperature or rear passen-
ger temperature/mode/blower settings while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
Rear Manual Climate Controls
Icon Description
Mode Knob
Mode Knob
To change the mode in the rear of the vehicle, turn the mode Control Knob to the desired mode
setting (Panel/Bi-Level/Floor). When rear controls are locked by the front system, the Rear Lock
symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are ignored.
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Rear MTC Control Knobs
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of
the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Rear Temperature Control Knob
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, turn the Temperature Control Knob. Turn it
to the right to raise the temperature, or turn it to the left to lower the temperature. When rear con-
trols are locked by the front system, the rear lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated
and any rear overhead adjustments are ignored.
Rear Blower Control Knob
The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any fixed blower speed by rotating the
Blower Control Knob in the rear of the vehicle. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the Rear Lock symbol on the temperature knob
is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are ignored.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
Automatic Climate Controls Overview
Radio 4.3 Automatic Tri-Zone Temperature Controls
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Automatic Tri-Zone Temperature
Controls
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Climate Controls Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press the button on the touchscreen to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when
MAX A/C is on. Pressing it again turns the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the MAX A/C indicator turns off.
NOTE: The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
Icon Description
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable
(button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside
of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control
selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and auto-
matic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
Front Defrost Button
The Front Defrost button changes the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illu-
minates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist out-
lets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting.
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Rear Defrost Button
The Rear Defrost Control button turns on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
REAR CLIMATE Rear Climate Control Button
Press and release this button to access the rear climate controls. The indicator will illuminate
when the rear climate controls are ON.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button
on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the face-
plate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on
the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indica-
tor is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear
passenger temperature/mode/blower settings with the driver temperature settings. Changing
the front or rear passenger temperature/mode/blower settings while in SYNC will automati-
cally exit this feature.
NOTE: The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
Icon Description
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen
Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen:
For Radio 4.3: use the circle around the blower icon by pressing on the circle spot where you
want the blower setting to be. To increase blower, the circle bar will go clockwise. To
decrease the blower, the circle bar will move counter-clockwise.
For Uconnect 3/3 NAV: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large
blower icon to increase the blower setting. The blower can also be selected by pressing the
blower bar area between the icons.
Panel Mode Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel out-
lets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
The Climate Off button or the OFF button turn the Climate Control System off.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front ATC Panel
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides heated
air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air
through the headliner outlets. The rear system temperature
control buttons are located in the Uconnect system, located
on the instrument panel.
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel. To change
the rear system settings:
• Press the ⬙REAR CLIMATE⬙ button to change control to
rear control mode, Rear display (below) will appear.
Control functions now operate rear system.
• To return to Front screen, press the ⬙FRONT CLIMATE⬙
button.
Radio 4.3 Automatic Rear Climate Buttons On The
Touchscreen
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Automatic Rear Climate Buttons On
The Touchscreen
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Rear Auto Button
Automatically controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and
automatic modes. Refer to ⬙Automatic Operation⬙ within this section for more information.
Rear Lock Button
Press and release to lock out the rear manual temperature controls from adjusting the rear tem-
perature and blower settings.
Done Button
For Radio 4.3: Press and release this button to complete any climate changes.
Front Climate Button
For Uconnect 3/3 NAV: Press and release this button to change the display on the Uconnect sys-
tem back to the Front Climate Controls.
Rear Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides front occupants ability to control rear temperature.
For Radio 4.3: Press and hold the slide bar to increase or decrease the temperature.
For Uconnect 3/3 NAV: Press and hold the slide bar to increase or decrease the temperature or
Push the up arrow button on the touchscreen to increase the temperature and Push the down
arrow button on the touchscreen to decrease the temperature.
When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s temperature moves up and down with the
driver’s temperature.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
Icon Description
SYNC Button — If Equipped
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indica-
tor is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear
passenger temperature/mode/blower settings with the driver temperature settings. Changing
the front or rear passenger temperature/mode/blower settings while in SYNC will automati-
cally exit this feature.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to
manual operation. The speeds can be selected using the buttons on the touchscreen.
Rear Passenger Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls off.
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Panel Mode. In
Panel Mode, air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard
outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut
off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these out-
lets.
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Bi-Level Mode. In
Bi-Level Mode, air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Floor Mode. In Floor
Mode, air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
1. Adjust the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the Rear
Modes to suit your comfort needs.
2. ATC is selected by adjusting the knob to the AUTO
position.
Rear ATC Control Features
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC System
achieves and maintain that comfort level. When the system
is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to
change the settings. You experience the greatest efficiency
by simply allowing the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The
system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and
fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
Icon Description
Mode Knob
Mode Knob
To change the mode in the rear of the vehicle, turn the mode Control Knob to the desired mode
setting (Panel/Bi-Level/Floor). When rear controls are locked by the front system, the Rear Lock
symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are ignored.
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of
the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Rear Temperature Control Knob
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, turn the Temperature Control Knob. Turn it
to the right to raise the temperature, or turn it to the left to lower the temperature. When rear con-
trols are locked by the front system, the rear lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated
and any rear overhead adjustments are ignored.
Rear Blower Control Knob
The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any fixed blower speed by rotating the
Blower Control Knob in the rear of the vehicle. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the Rear Lock symbol on the temperature knob
is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are ignored.
AUTO Button — If Equipped
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Performing this function causes the system to switch between manual mode and auto-
matic modes. Refer to ⬙Automatic Operation⬙ within this section for more information.
Rear Climate Control/Blower Off
To manually set the rear blower controls to off, press the Rear Climate Control/Blower Off button.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys-
tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of
the windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if
needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
the radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is
on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to
excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may
be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if equipped,
the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation is dis-
abled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to
use Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in the
control button to blink and then turns off.
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Tempera-
ture Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger
temperature control buttons. Once the desired tempera-
ture is displayed, the system achieves and automatically
maintains that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the US/Metric customer programmable
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” for further information. To provide you with maxi-
mum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start-
ups, the blower fan remains on low until the engine
warms up. The blower will increase in speed and
transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for proper coolant selection. Use
of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e.,
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor dam-
age when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select De-
frost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do
not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from
the air. Refer to an authorized dealer for filter replacement
instructions.
Operating Tips Chart
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door trim panel
control all of the door windows.
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN or ACC position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Uconnect, the power
window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. The time is
programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver’s power window switch has an Auto-Down
feature. Push the window switch past the first detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
Power Window Switches
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
On some models, the driver and front passenger power
window switches have an Auto-Up feature. Pull the win-
dow switch up to the second detent, release, and the
window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, pull the window switch up
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto-
Closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again
to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the Auto-Reverse function unexpectedly during Auto-
Closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury, be sure to clear
your arms, hands, fingers, and objects from the win-
dow path before closing the window. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim panel
allows you to disable the window control on the rear
passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push and
release the window lockout button (setting it in the down
position). To enable the window controls, push and release
the window lockout button again (setting it in the up
position).
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
Window Lockout Switch
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sun-
roof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. In-
jury may result.
Power Sunroof Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
Opening Sunroof
Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second, the sunroof and sunshade will open automatically
and stop at full open position. During Express Open
operation any other actuation of the sunroof switches will
stop the sunroof in a partially open position.
Manual Mode
Push and hold the switch rearward, the sunroof and
sunshade will open and automatically stop at full open
position. Releasing the switch while the sunroof is in
motion will stop the sunroof in a partially open position.
Vent Open
Push and release the Vent switch within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. During
Express Vent operation any other actuation of the sunroof
switches will stop the sunroof operation.
Closing Sunroof
Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. During Express Close operation any other actua-
tion of the sunroof switches will stop the sunroof in a
partially open position.
Manual Mode
Push and hold the switch forward and the sunroof will
close from any position and stop at a full closed position.
Releasing the switch while the sunroof is in motion will
stop the sunroof in a partially open position.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Anti Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the
sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction
in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this oc-
curs. Next, push the switch forward and release to Express
Close.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition is turned OFF.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Multimedia” for further in-
formation.
HOOD
Opening
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of
the instrument panel.
Hood Release
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
2. Outside of the vehicle, locate the safety latch lever near
the center of the grille between the grille and hood
opening. Push the safety latch lever to the left and raise
the hood.
3. Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole
on the underside of the hood.
Closing
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Underhood Safety Latch
Hood Prop Rod
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage:
• Before closing hood, make sure the hood prop rod is
fully seated into its storage retaining clips.
• Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm down-
ward push at the center front edge of the hood to
ensure that both latches engage. Never drive your
vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both
latches engaged.
LIFTGATE
Opening
The liftgate can be unlocked or locked pushing the unlock
or lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry key fob, the
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) lock/unlock button
underneath the left side of the accent bar, which is located
on the liftgate below the glass or by activating the power
door lock switch located on either front door trim panel.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” for further information on Keyless Enter-N-Go
(Passive Entry).
NOTE: The liftgate cannot be unlocked or locked with the
manual door lock plungers on the door trim panels or the
door lock cylinder on the driver’s door.
To open the unlocked liftgate, squeeze the handle and pull
the liftgate toward you. Gas props will raise and support
the liftgate in the open position.
NOTE: Because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it
may be necessary to assist the props when opening the
liftgate in cold weather.
Liftgate Release
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do
not use the recirculation mode.
Cargo Area Features
Cargo Management System
Five Passenger System Features
• A raised load floor that sits on top of a large built-in
storage bin.
• A tri-fold door built into the load floor that allows easy
access to items in the built-in storage bin.
• 60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer to
“Seats” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
•
An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature,
which extends cargo space even further. Refer to “Seats” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Cargo tie-downs.
• A retractable cargo area cover (if equipped).
Seven Passenger System Features
•
A large built-in storage bin with a hinged hardcover
located in the floor behind the third-row passenger seats.
• 60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer to
“Seats” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• 50/50 split third-row passenger seats with fold flat
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer to
“Seats” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
•
An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature,
which extends cargo space even further. Refer to “Seats” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Cargo tie-downs.
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Retractable Cargo Area Cover (If Equipped) — Five
Passenger Models
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the
cargo area behind the top of the rear seats.
The cover, when extended, covers the cargo area to keep
items out of sight. Notches in the trim panels near the
liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place.
The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not in
use. You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to
make more room in the cargo area.
To Install The Cover:
1. Position the cover in the vehicle so that the flat side of
the housing faces upward.
2. Insert either the left or the right spring-loaded post
(located on the ends of the cover housing) into the left
attachment point or the right attachment point (shown).
3. Insert the spring-loaded post on the opposite end of the
cover housing into the attachment point on the opposite
side of the vehicle.
Installing Retractable Cargo Area Cover
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
4. Grab the cover handle and pull it toward you. As the
cover nears the liftgate opening, guide the rear attach-
ment posts (on both ends of the cover) into the notches
in the trim panels. Lower the cover to position the posts
into the bottom of the notches and release the handle.
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart-
ment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
Cargo Tie-Downs
WARNING!
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child seat
tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision, a tie-down
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose.
A child could be badly injured. Use only the anchors
provided for child seat tethers.
Cargo tie-downs are located on both rear trim panels.
These tie-downs should be used to secure loads safely
when the vehicle is moving.
Positioning Retractable Cargo Area Cover
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle han-
dling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your ve-
hicle:
• Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits de-
scribed on the label attached to the left door or left
door center pillar.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to
sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become
a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (hand-held
transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door
openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security sys-
tems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
Cargo Tie-Downs
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
The HomeLink buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different
HomeLink channels. The HomeLink indicator is located
above the center button.
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.
HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Consoles
HomeLink Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position, and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds or until the orange
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufac-
tured after 1995:
These garage door openers can be identified by the
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the
button that is normally used to open and close the door.
The name and color of the button may vary by manufac-
turer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the
LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate,
push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission,
which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in
the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door
or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button while
you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held trans-
mitter every two seconds until HomeLink has success-
fully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes.
NOTE: All channels will be erased. Individual channels
cannot be erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the
Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-
held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to
complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and re-
member to plug it back in?
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
tures. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
at HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-
tance.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 119
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
In-Floor Storage Bin With Removable Liner
NOTE: Position the front seat to at least a mid-track
position to provide easier access to the storage bin.
An in-floor storage bin is located behind each front seat.
Each 1.6 gal (5.9L) bin can hold up to 12, 12 oz (0.35L) cans,
plus ice, or other items. The removable bin liner allows for
easy filling, emptying, and cleaning.
To access the bin, position the floor mat aside (if equipped).
Pull the door latch release-loop upward to release the latch
and then forward to open the bin door.
Glove Compartment
In-Floor Storage
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The liner can be removed for easy cleaning.
Second-Row Map Pocket And Grocery Retainers —
If Equipped
A map storage pocket and grocery retainers are located on
the back of the driver’s and passenger’s seatbacks.
Removable Liner
Seat Storage And Grocery Retainers
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 121
Floor Console Storage
An open storage area, or cubby bin, is located in the floor
console.
Center Console Storage
There is a storage tray and storage compartment located
under the center console armrest.
Floor Console Cubby Bin Center Console
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Pull upward on the release handle, located on the front of
the lid, to gain access to the storage tray and storage
compartment.
The storage tray can be slid forward and rearward or
removed to access the center console storage compartment.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a colli-
sion.
Center Console Storage Tray
Center Console Storage Compartment
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 123
Sliding Armrest
The center console armrest can also slide rearward for easy
access to the storage area.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a colli-
sion.
Cupholders
There are two cupholders, located in the center floor
console, for the front passengers.
For passengers in the second row there are two cupholders,
located in the center armrest between the two seats.
When the armrest is folded flat the cupholders are in the
back of the Head Restraint. The Head Restraint can be
adjusted to better position the cupholders.
Sliding Armrest Floor Console Cupholders
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
For vehicles equipped with third row seating, there are
additional cupholders located in the trim panels.
In addition to cupholders, vehicles may also be equipped
with bottle holders. The bottle holders are located on the
door trim panels.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning
the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to
avoid injury.
Armrest Cupholders Door Bottle Holder
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 125
Power Outlets
A 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet is located in the center
console below the radio. The power outlet has power
available when the ignition is in the ON/RUN or ACC
position.
This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar
lighter unit. To preserve the heating element, do not hold
the lighter in the heating position.
A second 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet is located inside
the center console storage area. Power is available with the
ignition is in the ON/RUN, ACC or LOCK position.
Front 12 Volt Power Outlet
Center Console 12 Volt Power Outlet
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
A third fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the back of
the center console. This power outlet has power available
when the ignition is in the LOCK, ON or ACC position.
A fourth fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the left
quarter trim panel in the cargo area. This power outlet has
power available when the ignition is in the ON or ACC
position.
Rear Seat 12 Volt Power Outlet
Rear Cargo Area Power Outlet
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 127
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
• The power outlet on the bottom of the center console
shares the fuse with the power outlet on the back of
the console. The combined usage must not exceed
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts.
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Im-
proper use of the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Power Outlet Fuses
1 — F103 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin And Power Outlet
Console Rear
2 — F102 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel And Power
Outlet Left Rear Cargo Area
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 129
Power Inverter — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 115 Volt AC (150 Watt
maximum) power outlet located on the back of the center
console. This outlet can power mobile phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to 150
Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles will exceed
this power limit, as will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter may
have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter manually
press the power inverter button OFF and ON. To avoid
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on electri-
cal devices prior to using the inverter.
NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power
outlet will shut down if the 115 Volt AC (150 Watt maxi-
mum) power rating is exceeded.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Inverter
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Inverter Operation
The power inverter is turned On and Off using the
Uconnect System.
Vehicles Equipped With Radio 4.3
To turn the power inverter on or off perform the following:
1. Press the “More” button on the faceplate (located next to
the Uconnect display).
2. Press the “Outlet” button on the touchscreen (located on
the Uconnect display) to turn the power inverter On or
Off.
Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect 3/3 NAV
To turn the power inverter on or off perform the following:
1. Press the “Controls” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Outlet” button on the touchscreen to turn the
power inverter On or Off.
Sunglasses Storage
To access the storage compartment, push on the raised bars
on the compartment door in the center of the console and
release and the door will swing downward.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The roof rack cross rails and side rails are designed to carry
cargo weight. The load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and
it should be distributed uniformly over the cross rails. In
addition, the roof rack does not increase the total load
carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of
cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the roof rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
NOTE: The roof rack side rails on your vehicle are NOT
designed to carry a load without the addition of crossbars.
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 131
Metal crossbars are offered by Mopar accessories to pro-
vide a functional roof rack system. See an authorized
dealer.
To Move The Crossbars
1. Loosen the knobs on top of each crossbar approximately
six turns to disengage the clamp tooth from the side rail.
2. Relocate the crossbars, aligning the crossbar stanchions
(end pieces) with one of the vertical marks on the
outboard surface of the side rail for proper positioning.
There are four frontward marks for the front crossbar
and four rearward marks for the rear crossbar. Make
sure the crossbars remain equally spaced or parallel at
any position for proper function.
3. Tighten the knobs on each crossbar to lock it in position.
As you tighten the knob, make sure the clamp tooth
engages completely into the side rail slot.
4. Attempt to move the crossbar to ensure that it is locked
in position.
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise when installing the crossbars,
make sure the arrows marked on the underside of the
crossbars face the front of the vehicle.
• To help reduce the amount of wind noise when the
crossbars are not in use, fasten the front crossbar in the
fourth position from the front and the rear crossbar in
the eighth position. The tie down holes on the crossbar
ends should always be used to tie down the load. Check
the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
Crossbar Knobs
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the ve-
hicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal
injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack cau-
tions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars installed. The load should be secured and
placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the
roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or other protective layer between the
load and the roof surface.
• Crossbars should remain equally spaced or parallel
at any roof rack position for proper function. Non-
compliance could result in damage to the roof rack,
cargo, and vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lb
(68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to
both the front and rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is espe-
cially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 133
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..................136
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions ............137
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...........138
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls .............................138
▫ Oil Change Due .......................139
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Menu
Items ...............................140
▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions
— If Equipped ........................143
䡵 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .........146
▫ Red Warning Lights .....................146
▫ Yellow Warning Lights ...................150
▫ Green Indicator Lights ...................153
▫ White Indicator Lights ...................154
▫ Blue Indicator Lights ....................154
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .155
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .........................155
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ...........................156
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the instrument cluster display messages. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, see “Servicing And Mainte-
nance.” Follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
NOTE: The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
when the ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important informa-
tion about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a
driver interactive display located on the instrument panel,
your instrument cluster display can show you how sys-
tems are working and give you warnings when they aren’t.
The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll
through and enter the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and make selec-
tions and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster.
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pushing the switches mounted on the
steering wheel. The menu items consist of the following:
• Radio Info
• Fuel Economy
• Vehicle Speed
• Trip Info
• Tire Pressure
• Vehicle Information
Instrument Cluster Display
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Messages
• Turn Menu OFF
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
• Up Arrow Button
• Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menus and
submenus.
• Down Arrow Button
• Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menus and
submenus.
• Right Arrow Button
• Push and release the right arrow button for
access to main menus or submenus. Push and
hold the right arrow button for two seconds to
reset features.
• BACK Button
• Push and release the BACK button to scroll
back to a previous menu.
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indi-
cator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will appear
in the instrument cluster display for five seconds after a
single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the up
arrow button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform the
following procedure:
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the igni-
tion to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button until “Fuel
Economy” displays highlighted in the instrument cluster
display and push the right arrow button. The following
Fuel Economy functions will display in the instrument
cluster display:
• Average Fuel Economy
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
• Instantaneous Fuel Economy
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. When
the fuel economy is reset, the display will read “RESET” or
show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history informa-
tion will be erased, and the averaging will continue from
the last fuel average reading before the reset.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the
fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the right arrow
button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated
driving distance, the DTE display will change to a “LOW
FUEL” message. This display will continue until the ve-
hicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel
to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW FUEL” message and
a new DTE value will display.
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
This display shows the instantaneous fuel economy MPG
or L/ 100 km in bar graph form while driving. This will
monitor the gas mileage in real-time as you drive and can
be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel
economy.
Vehicle Speed
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
“Vehicle Speed” displays highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push the right arrow button to display the
Fuel Economy
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
current speed in MPH or km/h. Pushing the right arrow
button a second time will toggle the unit of measure
between MPH or km/h.
NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Speed
menu will not change the unit of measure in the instrument
cluster display.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until “Trip
Info” displays highlighted in the instrument cluster display
and push the right arrow button. Pushing the right arrow
button with ⬙Trip Info⬙ highlighted will cause the instru-
ment cluster display to show Trip A, Trip B, and Elapsed
Time all in one display. If you want to reset one of the three
functions you use the up or down arrow button to high-
light (select) the feature that you want to reset. Pushing the
right arrow button will cause the selected feature to reset
individually. The three features can only be reset individu-
ally. The following Trip functions display in the instrument
cluster display:
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
tion:
Trip A
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Push and release the right arrow button once to
clear the resettable function.
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire Pressure
Push and release the up or down arrow button until “Tire
PSI:” displays highlighted in the instrument cluster dis-
play. Push and release the right arrow button to view a
graphic of the vehicle with a tire pressure value at each
corner of the graphic.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
“Vehicle Info” displays in the instrument cluster display
and push the right arrow button. Push the up or down
arrow button to scroll through the available information
displays.
• Coolant Temperature
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure — If Equipped
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Transmission Temperature
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
• Engine Hours
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
“Messages: XX” displays highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. If there is more than one message, pushing
the right arrow button will display a stored warning
message. Push and release the up or down arrow button if
there is more than one message to cycle through the
remaining stored messages. If there are no messages,
pushing the right arrow button will not change the display.
Turn Menu OFF
Select from Main Menu using the up or down arrow
button. Pushing the right arrow button clears the menu
display. Pushing any one of the four Display control
buttons will bring the menu back.
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state
of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate
that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
• The charging system is independent from load reduc-
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery
Charge Warning Light” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be affected by load
reduction:
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
• HVAC System
• 115V AC Power Inverter System
• Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads
are larger than the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping, etc.).
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electri-
cal accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar de-
vices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
• The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaners, game
consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
During a trip:
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V,
115V AC, USB ports
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
– Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (ad-
ditional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio sys-
tems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and
Ignition Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time
and parking time).
• The vehicle should have service performed if the mes-
sage is still present during consecutive trips, and if the
evaluation and driving pattern of the vehicle did not
help to identify the cause.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru-
ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive. Always refer to the information
in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All active
telltales will display first if applicable. The system check
menu may appear different based upon equipment options
and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger
seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the
light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Re-
minder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
— Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with
the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light
is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
— Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake functions, in-
cluding brake fluid level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that
there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
— Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15
seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
— Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This warning light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. If the engine coolant temperature is too high, this
indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If
the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous
chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool: whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
— Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a high
transmission fluid temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly
faster, with the transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may
continue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is run-
ning, there may be a malfunction with the charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
148 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine
oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as possible, and contact
an authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This
light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The
engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a problem
with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light
will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the
problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the
PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light
remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will
usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
NOTE: This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
— Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there’s a fault with
the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system. Refer to “Power
Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
— Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and
not fully closed.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
— Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the liftgate is open.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Yellow Warning Lights
— Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a
part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control sys-
tems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the ignition switch from
OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor
quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start.
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through
several typical driving styles. In most situations, the ve-
hicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
150 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the Electronic Sta-
bility Control system is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light”
in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and
when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continu-
ously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this warning light remains
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed
to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recom-
mended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring.
In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption
may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
above, the display will show the indications corresponding
to each tire.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
152 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to your au-
thorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not function-
ing and service is required as soon as possible. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have
the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
— Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 gal (7.5 L), this
light will turn on and a chime will sound. The light will
remain on until fuel is added.
— Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
Green Indicator Lights
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or
headlights are turned on.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
— Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn
signal indicator will flash independently and the corre-
sponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals
can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved
down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
— Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise control
is set to the desired speed. Refer to “Speed Control” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
White Indicator Lights
— Cruise Control Ready Indicator
This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise control
is ready, but not set. Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high
beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of
the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunc-
tion lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn
off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙
scenario.
154 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission
control systems. When these systems are operating prop-
erly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and
fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see
an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to ac-
cess this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Mul-
timedia”.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Main-
tenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is
not on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the follow-
ing:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
156 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the igni-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
SAFETY
CONTENTS
䡵 SAFETY FEATURES ......................160
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............160
▫ Electronic Brake Control System ............161
䡵 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS .............168
▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ......168
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........174
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features .........174
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............174
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................176
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ........188
▫ Child Restraints .......................201
▫ Transporting Pets ......................222
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ...........................222
▫ Transporting Passengers ..................222
▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................223
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ..............................223
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ....................226
5
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most brak-
ing conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
tion(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio trans-
mitting equipment. This interference can cause pos-
sible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase brak-
ing or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
160 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifica-
tion may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake sys-
tem will continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warn-
ing Light” does not come on when the ignition is turned to
the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as
possible.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The sys-
tem detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
5
SAFETY 161
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay
on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is re-
quired. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come
on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
162 SAFETY
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve-
hicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by apply-
ing the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
5
SAFETY 163
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa-
bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
164 SAFETY
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described
in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplan-
ing. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is turned to the ON mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
5
SAFETY 165
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be on even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic Sta-
bility Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resum-
ing acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake
or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releas-
ing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also,
be certain to place the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster display,
refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
166 SAFETY
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
For vehicles not equipped with an instrument cluster
display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within 20
seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slightly more than one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and then back to ON.
If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA
is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine power to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS
and ESC are in a reduced mode.
5
SAFETY 167
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automati-
cally once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/ Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may be
reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to
individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
“Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for infor-
mation on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The
tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This
is normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
168 SAFETY
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light) illumi-
nates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recom-
mended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light to turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of
33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi
(193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warn-
ing Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off only after
the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
5
SAFETY 169
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed
for use on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to
a poor overall system performance or sensor damage.
Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to
assure proper TPM feature operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-
come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealership to have your sensor
function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the TPM sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-
inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
170 SAFETY
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four tire pressure monitoring sensors
• Various tire pressure monitoring system messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster
and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low
in one or more of the four active road tires. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a graphic of
each tire with the low tire pressure values in a different
color, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be displayed.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different color
in the instrument cluster display graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in the
⬙Inflate to XX⬙⬙ message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically up-
date and the graphic display in the instrument cluster will
change color back to the original color, and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
5
SAFETY 171
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a mini-
mum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place
of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will no longer flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure value
will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel hous-
ings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
• The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the pressure in the compact spare tire.
• If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will remain
on and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in
the instrument cluster will still display a pressure value
in a different color and an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message.
172 SAFETY
• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value.
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will display
a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of
five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off
and the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can be deac-
tivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies (road
tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have
TPMS Sensors, such as when installing winter wheel and
tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with Tire
Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the ve-
hicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster
will display the “Service Tire Pressure System” message
and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “Service Tire Pressure System”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
5
SAFETY 173
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
turn off. The instrument cluster will display the “Service
Tire Pressure System” message and then display pressure
values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the
⬙Service Tire Pressure System⬙ message will no longer be
displayed as long as no system fault exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
174 SAFETY
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) must be secured in the appro-
priate child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a
rear seating position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Cus-
tomer Assistance” section for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
5
SAFETY 175
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passen-
ger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuck-
led (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
176 SAFETY
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck-
led again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 177
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one an-
other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
178 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
5
SAFETY 179
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
180 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top of
the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
5
SAFETY 181
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button.
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
• Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only
if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat
Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
182 SAFETY
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including preg-
nant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack
from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices
may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature — If Equipped
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped and the
second row outboard seat belt system may be equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may help further
reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat
belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to
release webbing in a controlled manner.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
5
SAFETY 183
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) —
If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (Third
Row Shown — If Equipped)
184 SAFETY
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-
ing mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in-
crease the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
5
SAFETY 185
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable components,
and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily iden-
tified by any markings, only through visual inspection of
the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two
halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the
back half being decorative plastic.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the
Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact
requires deployment, both the driver and front passenger
seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of
the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This
system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of
rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may not
deploy in the event of a front or side impact. However, if
during a front impact, a secondary rear impact occurs, the
AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the
impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components:
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam And Trim)
2 — Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
3 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
4 — Seat Back
186 SAFETY
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active
Head Restraint, ensure that all cargo is secured, as
loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint
during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning
could cause personal injury if the Active Head Re-
straint is deployed.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Head Restraints” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle.”
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Deployed
5
SAFETY 187
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered during a colli-
sion, the front half of the head restraint will be extended
forward and separated from the rear half of the head
restraint (See Image). Do not drive your vehicle after the
AHRs have deployed. The head restraint must be reset into
the original position to best protect the occupant for all
types of collisions. An authorized FCA US LLC dealer must
reset the AHRs on the driver’s and front passenger’s seat
before driving. Personally attempting to reset the AHRs
may result in damage to the AHRs that could impair their
function.
WARNING!
Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect you in all
types of collisions. Have deployed AHRs reset by an
authorized dealer immediately.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring asso-
ciated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
188 SAFETY
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch
is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the
ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the
ACC position, the air bag system is not on and
the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warn-
ing Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
5
SAFETY 189
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag
covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
(Continued)
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
190 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 191
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passen-
ger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of
the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping
to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
192 SAFETY
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are
marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on
the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
5
SAFETY 193
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
194 SAFETY
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are lo-
cated should remain free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
mines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a
particular impact event is appropriate, based on the sever-
ity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the
ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact
events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts,
the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
5
SAFETY 195
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side win-
dows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly re-
strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
196 SAFETY
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In
the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover
event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate,
the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE: The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
5
SAFETY 197
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assem-
blies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem.
• Unlock the power door locks.
198 SAFETY
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
• Cut off battery power to the:
• Engine
• Electric Motor (if equipped)
• Electric power steering
• Brake booster
• Electric park brake
• Automatic transmission gear selector
• Horn
• Front wiper
• Headlamp washer pump
NOTE: After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition
to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the
vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident,
reset the system by following the procedure described
below. If you have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine.
5
SAFETY 199
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in-
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger
side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an au-
thorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accel-
erator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
200 SAFETY
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investi-
gation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stan-
dards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
5
SAFETY 201
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call: 1–888–
327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: http://
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-
childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert-
ible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years
old or who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have outgrown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the vehi-
cle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in a rear seat
of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child
Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have outgrown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat
of the vehicle
202 SAFETY
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-
facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air
bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear support
leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not
designed to manage the crash forces of this type of car
seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function as it
was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and your
child may be more severely injured as a result.
5
SAFETY 203
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and con-
vertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be-
cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the ve-
hicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
204 SAFETY
Integrated Child Booster Seat — If Equipped
The Integrated Child Booster Seat is located in each out-
board second-row passenger seat.
WARNING!
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur,
• Follow all instructions on the child restraint and in
the vehicle’s owner’s manual.
• The second row bench with Integrated Child Booster
Seat must remain in the full rear position during use.
• Use only with children who weigh between 48 and
85 pounds (22 and 39 kg) and whose height is
between 47 and 57 in (119 and 145 cm).
To position a child into the Integrated Child Booster Seat
follow these steps:
1. Slide the second row seat to the full rear position to use
the Integrated Child Booster Seat.
NOTE: The second row bench with Integrated Child
Booster Seat must remain in the full rear position during
use.
2. Pull the release loop forward to release the latch and
seat cushion.
Release Loop
5
SAFETY 205
3. Lift the seat cushion up and push back to lock it in the
booster seat position.
4. Place the child upright in the seat with their back firmly
against the seatback.
5. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
6. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary
to allow the seat belt to go around the child’s lap.
NOTE: The lap portion of the seat belt should be low on
the hips and as snug as possible.
7. Once the seat belt is long enough to fit properly, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
8. To remove the slack from the lap belt, pull upward on
the shoulder portion of the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
Booster Seat Proper Belt Use
206 SAFETY
WARNING!
Securely lock the seat cushion into position before
using the seat. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat cushion could cause serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
In a severe collision, the booster seat may be damaged
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer and
possibly replaced before it is used again. The inte-
grated booster seat must be replaced following a colli-
sion that meets any of the following criteria:
• The vehicle cannot be driven away from the scene.
• The vehicle door nearest the seat has been damaged.
• At least one occupant was injured in the crash.
• At least one air bag in the vehicle deployed in the
crash.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder be-
tween the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
5
SAFETY 207
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
208 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating posi-
tions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
LATCH Label
Lower Anchor / Top Tether Locations (Third Row Shown –
If Equipped)
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
5
SAFETY 209
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the
LATCH anchorages if allowed by the
booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more in-
formation.
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in-
stall a child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the LATCH an-
chorages in an outboard position.
210 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint Owner’s Manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes All second row head restraints are remov-
able if they interfere with the installation
of the child restraint.
Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Rear Seat Lower Anchorages (Second Row 60/40)
5
SAFETY 211
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
second row seating position, located on the back
of the seat, near the floor.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-
facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 5 lower LATCH anchorages in the rear
seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right outboard
position behind the front passenger (1). Anchorages D and
E are used for the left outboard position behind the driver
(3). Anchorages B and C are used for the center seating
position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible child
restraint using anchorages C and D. This is not a LATCH-
compatible position in your vehicle.
You can install up to two child seats using the LATCH
system at the same time. If you are installing three child
restraints, you must use the seat belt to install the center
child restraint. You can use either the LATCH anchors for
positions (1) and (3) or the vehicle’s seat belt for installing
the child seats in the outboard positions.
Tether Anchorages (Second Row 60/40)
212 SAFETY
Options for installing two child seats using the LATCH
anchorages in this vehicle:
1. Right and left outboard seating positions (1 and 3):
Install the child seats in the right and left outboard
seating positions using lower anchorages A and B, and
D and E. Do not use the center seat anchorage, C. If the
child seats do not block the center seat belt webbing and
buckle, the center seat belt can be used to restrain an
occupant or child restraint in the center seating position.
2. Left outboard and center seating positions (3 and 2):
Install the first child seat in the left outboard seating
position using lower anchorages D and E. Install the
second child seat using the center anchorages, B and C.
Do not use the outer anchorage closest to the opposite
door, A. Do not use the remaining right outboard
seating position (1) for any occupant. The center child
restraint will block the seat belt buckle for this position.
WARNING!
• Use anchorages B and C to install a LATCH-
compatible child restraint in the center seating posi-
tion (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible child
restraint using anchorages C and D. This is not a
LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
• A child restraint installed in the center position (2)
will block the seat belt buckle for the empty right
outboard seat behind the front passenger (1). Do not
use this seat for another occupant.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint.
(Continued)
Lower Anchors
5
SAFETY 213
WARNING! (Continued)
• If you are installing three child restraints next to each
other, you must use the seat belt and the center tether
anchor for the center position. You can then use
either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt
for installing the child seats in the outboard posi-
tions. Please refer to “To Install the LATCH-
Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical in-
stallation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchor-
ages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
214 SAFETY
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
5
SAFETY 215
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR. The cinching latch plate is designed to
hold the lap portion of the seat belt tight when webbing is
pulled tight and straight through a child restraint’s belt
path.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) And CINCH Locations
(Third Row Shown)
Cinching Latchplate = CINCH
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
216 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the
child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is al-
lowed, if the child restraint manufac-
turer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be re-
moved?
Yes All second row head restraints are
removable if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint.
Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Get-
ting To Know Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
Yes – CINCH
No – ALR
In positions with cinching latch
plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk may
be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do not
twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
5
SAFETY 217
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You
may also move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
218 SAFETY
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching Latch
Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped:
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and / or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You
may also move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
5
SAFETY 219
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-
end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert the latch
plate into the buckle with the release button facing out,
away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to
complete the installation of the child restraint.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the
buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate into
the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child restraint
installation tight, try a different seating position.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
220 SAFETY
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the
head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Seat Track Release Lever
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting (Second Row 60/40)
5
SAFETY 221
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be-
hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
222 SAFETY
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even-
tually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex-
haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
5
SAFETY 223
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air
Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until the
fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See an autho-
rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of
the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelera-
tor, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor mat using the
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasten-
ers on a regular basis.
(Continued)
224 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelera-
tor, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
5
SAFETY 225
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are
suspected. The cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
226 SAFETY
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING THE ENGINE ..................229
▫ Automatic Transmission ..................229
▫ Normal Starting .......................230
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition .............231
▫ Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F
Or −30°C) ............................231
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ..................232
▫ After Starting..........................232
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .232
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .233
䡵 PARKING BRAKE .......................234
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ..............236
▫ Ignition Park Interlock ...................237
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .237
▫ Four-Speed Or Six-Speed Automatic
Transmission ..........................237
▫ Gear Ranges ..........................238
䡵 POWER STEERING ......................244
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ...............245
䡵 ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED . . .245
䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ..........246
▫ To Activate ...........................247
▫ To Set A Desired Speed...................247
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ................247
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .................248
▫ To Resume Speed ......................249
▫ To Deactivate .........................249
6
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST
— IF EQUIPPED ........................249
▫ ParkSense Sensors ......................249
▫ ParkSense Display ......................250
▫ ParkSense Warning Display................253
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........253
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System. .253
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System.............254
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions .........254
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ........255
䡵 REFUELING THE VEHICLE ................257
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .............258
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING .....................259
▫ Vehicle Certification Label ................259
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ........259
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ..........259
▫ Overloading ..........................259
▫ Loading .............................260
䡵 TRAILER TOWING ......................260
▫ Common Towing Definitions...............260
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ................263
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) .............................264
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ...............265
▫ Towing Requirements ...................266
▫ Towing Tips ..........................270
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ....................272
▫ T
owing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle. . . .272
䡵 DRIVING TIPS ..........................273
▫ Driving On Slippery Surfaces ..............273
▫ Driving Through Water ..................274
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in “OFF” mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
Normal Starting
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle.
If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short
pushes in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition
will remain in the ACC mode until the gear selector is in
PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF mode.
If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once, the instrument
cluster will display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and
the engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle
out of the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE: If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button with the vehicle
speed below 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut
off, and the ignition will remain in the ACC position. The
system will automatically time out and the ignition will
cycle to the OFF mode after 30 minutes of inactivity if the
ignition is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running)
mode and the transmission is in PARK.
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driv-
er’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC, and RUN.
To change the ignition modes without starting the vehicle
and use the accessories, follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC mode.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN mode.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF mode.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Start/
Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob is in the passenger
compartment.
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
⬙Normal Starting⬙ or ⬙Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedure it
may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine for no more
than 15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case
the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the RUN
position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the “Nor-
mal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery
or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump
Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time.
Wait 60 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
three-wire extension cord.
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood
between the headlight assembly and the Totally Integrated
Power Module (Fuse Box) on the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
cord could cause electrocution.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Fluids And
Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem. Please check your oil level with
the engine oil indicator often during the break in period.
Add oil as required.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
PARKING BRAKE
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake
is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower
left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park
brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the
parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time
and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster
will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission
is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If
vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting
to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
Parking Brake
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving unattended
children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an au-
thorized dealer immediately.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Ignition Park Interlock
Your vehicle is equipped with a Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. This helps the
driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks
the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
OFF mode.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN mode (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
Four-Speed Or Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the gear selector
out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System” in this section). To drive, move the gear selector
from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a pre-
cise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (-/+) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control. Moving the gear selector into the AutoStick (-/+)
position (below the Drive position) activates Autostick
mode, providing manual shift control and displaying the
current gear in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick mode,
tapping the gear selector left (-) or right (+) will manually
select the transmission gear. Refer to ⬙AutoStick⬙ in this
section for further information.
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
Gear Selector
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the ignition OFF.
• Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exit-
ing the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the gear selector
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Op-
erating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control
(refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further information)
to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a
lower gear will improve performance and extend transmis-
sion life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the powertrain controller will modify the transmis-
sion shift schedule and expand the range of torque con-
verter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent trans-
mission damage due to overheating.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission tempera-
ture as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maxi-
mum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter clutch
is inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to
the “Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this sec-
tion). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or
below), operation may briefly be limited to only second
gear (for four-speed transmission) or third gear (for six-
speed transmission). Normal operation will resume once
the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Autostick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature pro-
viding manual shift control, giving you more control of the
vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and im-
prove overall vehicle performance. This system can also
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
provide you with more control during passing, city driv-
ing, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position (below
the DRIVE position), it can be moved from side to side.
This allows the driver to manually select the transmission
gear being used. Moving the gear selector to the left (-)
triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift. The
current gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down
when the driver moves the gear selector to the right (+) or
left (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition
would result. It will remain in the selected gear until
another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described
below.
• The transmission will automatically upshift when nec-
essary to prevent engine over-speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in any gear except top
gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second
gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy
or icy conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault
or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to
the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick
position at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for ab-
normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in second gear (for four-speed transmission) or third gear
(for six-speed transmission) regardless of which forward
gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will
continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically con-
trolled Overdrive (top gear). The transmission will auto-
matically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions
are present:
• The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.
• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-
perature.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
• The engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera-
ture.
• The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different
feeling or response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm (usu-
ally after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the
engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is
not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not
shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. Using
the AutoStick shift control, when the transmission is suffi-
ciently warm, will demonstrate that the transmission is
able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering
capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This
is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in
any way damage the steering system.
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service
interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked
if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent,
and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coor-
dinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not
overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended power
steering fluid.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power steer-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for the correct fluid type.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive (AWD).
The system is automatic with no driver inputs or addi-
tional driving skills required. Under normal driving con-
ditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction. If the
front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted auto-
matically to the rear wheels. The greater the front wheel
traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the rear
wheels.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input
(where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent to
the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle launch
and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size
may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF 3 — SET (-)
2 — RES (+) 4 — CANCEL
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn the
system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The
Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, push the SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the RES (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle
will deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button, or returning the ignition to
OFF, erases the set speed from memory.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” in this
section for limitations of this system and recommenda-
tions.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation
of the obstacle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display will
turn on indicating the system status.
Park Assist Ready
Park Assist System Off
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone. As
the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the instrument
cluster display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone
will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Slow Tone
Fast Tone
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-39 inches
(200-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches (30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2-
Second Tone
Slow Fast Continuous
Arcs None 3 Solid
(Continuous)
3 Slow
Flashing
2 Slow
Flashing
1 Slow
Flashing
Continuous Tone
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
“Sound and Display” is selected from the Uconnect Sys-
tem. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru-
ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indi-
cate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the
detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
⬙Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled using the Uconnect
System. The available choices are: Off, Sound Only, or
Sound and Display. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” for further information.
When the ParkSense button is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster display will show the
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for approximately
five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display
will show the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist system has detected a fault condition, the instru-
ment cluster display will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “CLEAN PARK
ASSIST”, “SERVICE PARK ASSIST”, or “SERVICE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a fault condition,
the instrument cluster display will show the ⬙CLEAN
PARK ASSIST⬙, ⬙SERVICE PARK ASSIST⬙,OR⬙SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM⬙ messages for as long as the vehicle
is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not
operate.
If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST” appears in the instrument
cluster display, make sure the outer surface and the under-
side of the rear fascia/bumper are clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction. Then, cycle the ignition.
If the message continues to appear, see an authorized
dealer.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM” appears in the instrument cluster display, see an
authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
display will read “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Fur-
thermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition
key.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster display will show the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Ensure the ParkSense system is OFF if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within 12
inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to
do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM” message to appear in the instrument
cluster display.
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the
rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to
“CHECK ENTIRE SURROUNDINGS” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The
ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above
the rear license plate.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the last selected touchscreen
appears again.
The camera image is also available in the rearview mirror
if the touchscreen display is unavailable.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature
and it is turned on, the rear camera image will be displayed
for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, the X
button on the camera display screen is pressed, or the
vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle.
These lines will show separate zones that will help indicate
the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
mable modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are re-
sponsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left
side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure
the replacement cap has been designed for use with this
vehicle.
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door reinforce-
ment.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
• Failure to follow this warning may result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impurities
into the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the “Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
NOTE:
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on
if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the
gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the instrument
cluster. If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly
and press the Trip Odometer button to turn off the mes-
sage. If the problem continues, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL.
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the
“Vehicle Certification Label”. This information should be
used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the
drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of vehicle
• Month, Day, and Hour of manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load
must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is impor-
tant that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear
GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if
either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels,
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as
long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and
rear GAWR.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle
is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it
is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on
the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the
brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or tempo-
rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of
the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control — Electronic
Refer to “Safety Features/Trailer Sway Control (TSC)” in
“Safety” for further information.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
Trailer Sway Control — Mechanical
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addi-
tion of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the
maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow
and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight
ratings towable for your given drivetrain:
Engine/Transmission
GCWR (Gross Com-
bined Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Tongue
Wt.
2.4L/Automatic 6,000 lbs (2,721 kg) 22 sq ft
(2.0 sq m)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
which includes up to 5
persons & Luggage
100 lbs (45 kg)
3.6L/Automatic 7,300 lbs (3,311 kg) 32 sq ft
(3.0 sq m)
2,500 lbs (1,133 kg)
which includes 1 to 2
persons & Luggage
200 lbs (90 kg)
7,300 lbs (3,311 kg) 32 sq ft
(3.0 sq m)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
which includes 3 to 4
persons & Luggage
150 lbs (68 kg)
7,300 lbs (3,311 kg) 32 sq ft
(3.0 sq m)
1,500 lbs (680 kg)
which includes 5 to 7
persons & Luggage
100 lbs (45 kg)
* Except for
AWD models
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of
the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tires” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for further information.
• * For All Wheel Drive (AWD) models carrying five to
seven persons and luggage will exceed the rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) and therefore should not be
attempted.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
CAUTION!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the
front of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on the
tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to
sway severely side to side which will cause loss of
control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers
heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
Weight Distribution
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components the following guidelines are recommended:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When traile-
ring cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load
shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage
to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus-
pension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross
the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmis-
sion in PARK. Always block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer
wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance Plan”.
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing And Mainte-
nance” for further information. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR, or GCWR, ratings.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer
is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine
and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing
while using a full size spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper tire
inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper inspection procedure.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper tire replacement proce-
dures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capac-
ity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible per-
sonal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing, you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However,
if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, use the
AutoStick shift control to manually select a lower gear.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat build up. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes
of continuous operation, then change the transmission
fluid and filter as specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or
frequent trailer towing”. Refer to the “Scheduled Servic-
ing” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
NOTE: Check the four-speed automatic transmission fluid
level before towing. The six-speed transmission does not
require a fluid level check before towing. If, however, you
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, see your
authorized dealer immediately for assistance.
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
AutoStick
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the high-
est gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “4” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or “2”
if needed to maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary
to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheat-
ing, take the following actions:
City Driving
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
• Reduce speed.
• Temporarily turn off air conditioning.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Ground FWD Models AWD Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
NOTE: When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial
Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Recreational Towing
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow
dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this
procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmission
in PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drive-
train will result. If this vehicle requires towing,
make sure the drive wheels are OFF the ground.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or
using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only
acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another
vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the
ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
DRIVING TIPS
Driving On Slippery Surfaces
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the front (driving)
wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and care-
fully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be
observed:
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
• Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first be-
come visible.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Driving Through Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and pre-
vent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path’s surface and
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Further-
more, flowing and/or rising water can carry your ve-
hicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shal-
low standing water, consider the following Cautions and
Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping dis-
tances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in inju-
ries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always in-
spect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmis-
sion, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ............278
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ....................278
▫ Replacement Bulbs .....................278
▫ Replacing Exterior Bulbs .................280
䡵 FUSES ................................283
▫ Interior Fuses .........................283
▫ Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center) . .286
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...........290
▫ Jack Location .........................290
▫ Spare Tire Location And Removal ...........290
▫ Preparations For Jacking .................292
▫ Jacking Instructions .....................293
▫ Road Tire Installation ....................298
▫ Spare Tire Stowage......................300
䡵 JUMP STARTING ........................300
▫ Preparations For Jump Start ...............300
▫ Jump Starting Procedure ..................302
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .............303
▫ 2.4L Engine — If Equipped ................304
䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ..............304
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............305
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ............306
▫ All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models ............308
▫ Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models ...........308
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ...............................309
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ............309
7
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the switch
bank just above the climate controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the
switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may discharge the battery.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Courtesy/Reading Lamps (Incandescent) 578
Courtesy/Reading Lamps (Optional LED) LED (Serviced at authorized dealer)
Glove Compartment Lamp 194
Cargo Lamp 579
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder LED (Serviced at authorized dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
278 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlamp 9006
High Beam Headlamp 9005
Front Park/Turn Signal 3757AK
Side Marker Lamp 168
Front Fog Lamp PSX24W or 2504
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at authorized dealer)
License Lamp 168
Exterior Bulbs – Rear (LED Version)
Bulb Number
Rear Tail/Stop Lamp LED (Serviced at authorized dealer)
Rear Tail (Liftgate) Lamp LED (Serviced at authorized dealer)
Rear Turn Signal Lamp WY21W or 7440A
Backup Lamp W21W or 7440
Exterior Bulbs – Rear (Bulb Version)
Bulb Number
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Signal Lamp P27/7W or 3157
Rear Tail (Liftgate) Lamp P27/7W or 3157
Backup Lamp P27/7W or 3157
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 279
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric condi-
tions change to allow the condensation to change back into
a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
Front Low/High Beam Headlamp, Turn Signal/Park
Lamp, And Side Marker Lamp
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner filter
housing and position the Totally Integrated Power Module
(TIPM) aside to replace certain lamps in the left headlamp
housing.
2. Rotate the applicable bulb and connector assembly ¼
turn counterclockwise and remove the assembly from
the headlamp housing.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the harness connector and
then connect the replacement bulb.
Headlamp Housing
1 — Front Turn Signal/Park Lamp Bulb
2 — Side Marker Lamp Bulb
3 — Low Beam Headlamp Bulb
4 — High Beam Headlamp Bulb
280 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the head-
lamp housing and rotate it ¼ turn clockwise to lock it in
place.
Front Fog Lamp
NOTE: Turn the steering wheel to the right if replacing the
left front fog lamp or to the left if replacing the right front
fog lamp to allow for easier access to the front of the wheel
well.
1. Remove the fasteners retaining the front lower wheel
well access panel and remove the access panel.
2. Remove the electrical connector from the fog lamp
housing.
3. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and
pull straight out from the fog lamp.
CAUTION!
Never introduce leaded fuel to the tank, even in small
amounts in an emergency, as this would damage the
catalytic converter beyond repair.
Front Fog Lamp Electrical Connector
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 281
4. Install the replacement bulb and connector assembly
straight into the fog lamp until it locks into place.
5. Reinstall the front lower wheel well access panel and
fasteners.
Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp
The tail lamps are a two-piece design. The tail/stop/rear
turn signal lamps are located in the rear corner body
panels. The tail and backup lamps are located in the
liftgate.
License Plate Lamp
1. Push the small locking tab sticking out of the end of the
lens toward the side of the vehicle and hold it in that
position.
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool between the end of the lens
with the locking tab and the surrounding housing and
then pivot the tool to separate the lens from the housing.
3. Hold the lens with one hand and rotate the bulb’s
electrical connector ¼ turn counterclockwise with the
other hand and then separate the bulb and connector
assembly from the lens.
License Lamp
282 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
5. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the lens
and rotate the connector ¼ turn clockwise to lock it in
place.
6. Insert the end of the lens without the locking tab into the
housing on the liftgate and then push the opposite end
of the lens into the housing, making sure it locks in the
housing.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice
versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located on the passenger side
under the instrument panel.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 283
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
F100 30 Amp Pink – 110V AC Inverter – If Equipped
F101 – 10 Amp Red Interior Lights
F102 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter in Instrument Panel/Left Rear
Power Outlet
F103 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet in Console Bin/Power Outlet
in Rear of Console
F105 – 20 Amp Yellow Heated Seats – If Equipped
F106 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Power Outlet
F107 – 10 Amp Red Rear Camera – If Equipped
F108 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel
F109 – 10 Amp Red Climate Control/HVAC
F110 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller
F112 – 10 Amp Red Spare
F114 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear HVAC Blower/Motor
F115 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Wiper Motor
F116 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL)
F117 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors
F118 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller
F119 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module
F120 – 10 Amp Red All Wheel Drive – If Equipped
284 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
F121 – 15 Amp Blue Wireless Ignition Node
F122 – 25 Amp Clear Driver Door Module
F123 – 25 Amp Clear Passenger Door Module
F124 – 10 Amp Red Mirrors
F125 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module
F126 – 25 Amp Clear Audio Amplifier
F127 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – If Equipped
F128 – 15 Amp Blue Radio
F129 – 15 Amp Blue Video/DVD – If Equipped
F130 – 15 Amp Blue Climate Control/Instrument Panel
F131 – 10 Amp Red Passenger Assistance/Hands Free System –
If Equipped
F132 – 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Module
F133 – 10 Amp Red Cyber Security Gateway
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 285
Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)
The power distribution center is located in the engine
compartment.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
F101 60 Amp Yellow – Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
F102 60 Amp Yellow – Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
F103 60 Amp Yellow – Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
F105 60 Amp Yellow – Interior Power Distribution Center Rail Igni-
tion Run Relay
F106 60 Amp Yellow – Interior Power Distribution Center Rail Run/
Accessory Relays
Power Distribution Center
286 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
F139 40 Amp Green – Climate Control System Blower
F140 30 Amp Pink – Power Locks
F141 40 Amp Green – Anti-Lock Brake System
F142 40 Amp Green – Glow Plugs – If Equipped
F143 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lights 1
F144 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lights 2
F145 30 Amp Pink – To Body Computer – Lamp
F146 30 Amp Pink – Spare
F147 30 Amp Pink – Spare
F148 40 Amp Green – Radiator Fan Motor
F149 30 Amp Pink – Starter Solenoid
F150 – 25 Amp Clear Powertrain Control Modules
F151 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer Motor – If Equipped
F152 – 25 Amp Clear Diesel Fuel Heater – If Equipped
F153 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump
F156 – 10 Amp Red Brake/Electronic Stability Control Module
F157 – 10 Amp Red Power Transfer Unit Module – If Equipped
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 287
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
F158 – 10 Amp Red Active Hood Module – If Equipped
F159 – 10 Amp Red Spare
F160 – 20 Amp Yellow Interior Lights
F161 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F162 40 Amp Red/20
Amp Lt. Blue
– Cabin Heater #1/Vacuum Pump – If
Equipped
F163 50 Amp Red – Cabin Heater #2 – If Equipped
F164 – 25 Amp Clear Powertrain Auto Shutdown
F165 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain Shutdown
F166 – 20 Amp Yellow Spare
F167 – 30 Amp Green Powertrain Shutdown
F168 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioner Clutch
F169 40 Amp Green – Emissions – Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle
Motor
F170 – 15 Amp Blue Emissions – Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle
Actuators
F172 – 20 Amp Yellow Spare
F173 – 25 Amp Clear Anti Lock Brake Valves
288 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
F174 – 20 Amp Yellow Siren – If Equipped
F175 – 30 Amp Green Spare
F176 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain Control Modules
F177 – 20 Amp Yellow All Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
F178 – 25 Amp Clear Sunroof – If Equipped
F179 – 10 Amp Red Battery Sensor
F181 100 Amp Blue – Electrohydraulic Steering (EHPS) – If
Equipped
F182 50 Amp Red – Cabin Heater #3 – If Equipped
F184 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper Motor
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 289
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed underneath a cover in
the rear storage bin in the cargo area.
Spare Tire Location And Removal
The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the vehicle
and is held in place by means of a cable winch mechanism.
Jack Storage Location
290 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Spare Tire Removal
NOTE: On seven-passenger models, fold the third-row
passenger seats flat. This will provide more space when
accessing the jacking tools and when operating the winch
mechanism.
1. Remove the jack-handle components 1, 2 and 3 from
storage and assemble them.
NOTE: Assemble components 2 and 3 by seating the small
ball at the end of component 2 in the small hole at the end
of component 3. This will lock these components together.
Assemble components 1 and 2 so that the wheel nut socket
at the end of component 1 faces upward when seated on
component 2. This will make it easier to rotate the assem-
bly when operating the winch mechanism.
2. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive nut
located in the jack storage area. Rotate the jack-handle
assembly counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the
ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull the
spare tire out from underneath the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or
power tool may damage the winch.
3. Pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle and
raise it upright so the tire’s tread is on the ground.
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
1 — Component 1
2 — Component 2
3 — Component 3
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 291
4. Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and
remove it from the center of the wheel.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector in PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right
front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Spare Tire Retainer
292 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and set the transmis-
sion in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 293
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and jack-handle from stow-
age.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts on the wheel
with the flat tire. Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise
one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. Place the jack in the notches underneath the lift area that
is closest to the flat tire. Center the jack saddle between
the drain flute formations on the sill flange. Turn the
jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle
with the lift area of the sill flange.
Jacking Locations
Front Jacking Location
294 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Front Jack Engaged With Jack Handle
Rear Jacking Location
Rear Jack Engaged With Jack Handle
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 295
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise
with the jack handle. Raise the vehicle until the tire just
clears the road surface and enough clearance is obtained
to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides
maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel nuts. For vehicles so equipped,
remove the wheel cover from the wheel by hand. Do not
pry the wheel cover off. Then, pull the wheel off the hub.
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges.
6. Install the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Mounting Spare Tire
296 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance”
for additional warnings, cautions, and information
about the spare tire, its use, and operation.
7. Install the wheel nuts with the cone-shaped end of the
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter-
clockwise with the jack handle.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug nut
torque, refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical
Specifications”. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
10. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
11. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area. Do not
stow the deflated tire in the spare tire stowage
location. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or re-
placed as soon as possible.
12. To stow the winch cable and retainer, fit the assembled
jack-handle over the winch drive nut. Rotate the jack-
handle assembly clockwise until you hear the winch
mechanism click three times. It cannot be over tight-
ened.
13. Stow the jack-handle and jack. Remove the wheel
blocks from the vehicle and release the park brake.
14. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Adjust the
tire pressure as required.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 297
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting
studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install
the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward
the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve
stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand, snapping
the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or
excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Road Wheel
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
298 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug nut
torque, refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical
Specifications”. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
7. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. For proper lug nut torque,
refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifica-
tions”. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
dealer or service station.
5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 299
Spare Tire Stowage
NOTE: Refer to “Spare Tire Location And Removal” for
information on assembling the winch tools.
1. Place the spare tire near the winch cable. Hold the spare
upright so that the tire’s tread is on the ground and the
valve stem is at the top of the wheel facing away from
the rear of the vehicle.
2. Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and drop
it through the center of the wheel. Then place the spare
tire with the cable and retainer underneath the vehicle.
3. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive nut.
Rotate the jack-handle assembly clockwise to raise the
spare tire into the storage area. Continue to rotate the
jack-handle assembly until you hear the winch mecha-
nism click three times. It cannot be over tightened. Push
against the tire several times to be sure it is held securely
in place.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump
starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located between the left front
headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash shield.
To allow jump starting, there are remote battery posts
located on the left side of the engine compartment.
300 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmis-
sion into PARK and turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. To remove the cover, push the locking
tab and pull upward on the cover.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cable’s reach, apply the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
Remote Battery Posts
(+) — Remote Positive Post (Covered With Protective Cap)
(-) — Remote Negative Post
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 301
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the re-
mote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
302 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle,
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 303
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT
(H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
2.4L Engine — If Equipped
On hot days, the engine oil temperature may become too
hot during sustained high-speed driving or if towing a
trailer up long grades. If this happens, a HOTOIL message
will flash in the odometer and the vehicle speed will be
reduced to 48 mph (77 km/h) maximum until the engine
oil temperature is reduced.
NOTE: The maximum vehicle speed is reduced to 48 mph
(77 km/h), you may reduce vehicle speed further as
needed. Once the engine oil temperature is reduced, you
may continue to drive normally
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following
procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
304 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Open the center console and remove the gear selector
override access cover (located in the front lower right
corner of the console storage bin).
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar small tool into the access
port, and push and hold the override release lever
forward.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector override access cover.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will main-
tain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or
racing the engine.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the
risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to
free a stuck vehicle.
Gear Selector Override Access Cover
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 305
Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙ESC Partial
Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control” in “Safety” for further
information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the
⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
306 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground FWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE IF transmission is
operable:
• Ignition in ACC or
ON/RUN mode
• Transmission in NEU-
TRAL
• 25 mph (40 km/h)
max speed
• 15 miles (24 km)
max distance
NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED
Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is man-
datory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, not the ACC mode.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
for towing.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 307
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle
as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission
may result.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
on a flatbed, or with one end of the vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission
is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15
miles (24 km), it must be towed with the front wheels
OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, towing dolly, or
wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15
miles (24 km) with front wheels on the ground can
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from im-
proper towing is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
308 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Enhanced Accident Re-
sponse System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed under certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 309
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SCHEDULED SERVICING ..................313
▫ Maintenance Plan.......................314
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................318
▫ 2.4L Engine ..........................318
▫ 3.6L Engine ..........................319
▫ Checking Oil Level .....................320
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ...................320
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .................321
䡵 DEALER SERVICE .......................322
▫ Engine Oil ...........................322
▫ Engine Oil Filter .......................324
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter .................324
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ..............325
▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ............326
▫ Body Lubrication ......................327
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades .................327
▫ Exhaust System ........................329
▫ Cooling System ........................331
▫ Brake System .........................336
▫ Automatic Transmission ..................337
▫ Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) – AWD Models
Only ...............................340
▫ Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – AWD Models
Only ...............................340
䡵 RAISING THE VEHICLE ..................341
䡵 TIRES ................................341
▫ Tire Safety Information ..................341
▫ T
ires — General Information ..............351
▫ Tire Types ............................357
8
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ................358
▫ Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ..............361
▫ Tire Chains (Traction Devices) .............362
▫ Tire Rotation Recommendations ............363
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ..................365
▫ Treadwear ............................365
▫ Traction Grades ........................365
▫ Temperature Grades .....................365
䡵 BODYWORK ...........................366
▫ Protection From Atmospheric Agents ........366
▫ Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........367
▫ Preserving The Bodywork .................367
䡵 INTERIORS ............................368
▫ Seats And Fabric Parts ...................368
▫ Plastic And Coated Parts..................369
▫ Leather Parts ..........................369
▫ Glass Surfaces .........................370
▫ Cleaning The Cupholders ................370
312 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and E-85 fuel usage will influence
when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message
is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of
engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predominately at idle or
only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering, and transmission (4-
speed only) and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 313
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance plan on the following page for the
required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns
on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped with dipstick.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
314 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking
brake function.
XXX X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs (2.4L En-
gine). **
XX X X X
Replace spark plugs (3.6L En-
gine). **
X
Flush and replace the engine cool-
ant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
XX
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 315
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change the automatic transmis-
sion fluid and filter.
X
Change the automatic transmis-
sion fluid and filter if using your
vehicle for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer
towing.
XX
Replace rear drive assembly
(RDA) fluid.
XX
Replace power transfer unit (PTU)
fluid.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
316 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of
engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predominately at idle or
only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 317
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.4L Engine
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 8 — Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (4–Speed Only – If Equipped)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
5 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 11 — Coolant Pressure Cap
6 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post) 12 — Engine Oil Dipstick
318 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3.6L Engine
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 8 — Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Oil Filter Access 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Engine Oil Dipstick
5 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 11 — Engine Oil Fill
6 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post) 12 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 319
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off. Checking engine oil level when
the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. Either the range markings
consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a crosshatch
zone marked with MIN at the low end of the range and
MAX at the high end of the range. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0
liter) of oil when the reading is at the low end of the range
marking will raise the oil level to the high end of the range
marking.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the
engine with oil will cause oil aeration, which can lead
to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil tempera-
ture. This loss of oil pressure and increased oil tem-
perature could damage your engine.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer and the rear window washer share
the same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with wind-
shield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate
the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual
water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades
clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
320 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 liters) of washer
fluid when the message “LoWASH” appears in the instru-
ment cluster.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-
nance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment that is
located behind the left front fender and is accessible
through the wheel well. The wheel and tire assembly do
not need to be removed to access the compartment. Remote
battery terminals are located in the engine compartment
for jump starting. Refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in
“In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the
right and remove the access panel from the inner fender
shield.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 321
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your ve-
hicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec-
ommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
322 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Pe-
troleum Institute (API). The manu-
facturer only recommends API Cer-
tified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20,
0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine
oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil or
Shell Helix is recommended for all operating temperatures.
This engine oil improves low temperature starting and
vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on the
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Servicing And Maintenance”.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifica-
tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix Ultra or
equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures.
This engine oil improves low temperature starting and
vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compart-
ment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix
Ultra or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine
oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 323
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station
or governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters
and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
324 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the ve-
hicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap-
proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flam-
mable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap-
proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the sys-
tem to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, for further warranty
information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant un-
der high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condition-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 325
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recom-
mends that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
326 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Conditions that would require replacement:
• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
body)
• Rib or belt wear
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
• Belt slips
• “Groove jumping⬙ (belt does not maintain correct posi-
tion on pulley)
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard
or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such
as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected
for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the applica-
tion of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood ser-
vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 327
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
liftgate glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward
unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade
off of the liftgate glass.
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it forward
to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade
holder.
Lifting The Pivot Cap
1—WiperArm
2 — Pivot Cap
328 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press the
wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further information.
(Continued)
Removing The Wiper Blade
1 — Wiper Blade 3 — Wiper Arm
2 — Blade Pivot Pin 4 — Wiper Blade Holder
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 329
WARNING! (Continued)
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in
gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cooling System
WARNING!
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the
OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the
front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pres-
sure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 331
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system please contact your local autho-
rized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
NOTE:
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not
be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibi-
tors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propyl-
ene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of
propylene glycolbased engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
332 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for
assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti-
freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 333
•
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have
a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pres-
sure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regu-
lated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open contain-
ers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
2.4L Engine — The coolant bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine idling and warm to normal operating
temperature, the level of the coolant in the bottle should be
between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines, shown on the
bottle.
334 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3.6L Engine — The level of the coolant in the pressurized
coolant bottle should be between the “COLD” and “FULL”
range on the bottle when the engine is cold.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as
the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the cool-
ant bottle need only be checked once a month. When
additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to main-
tain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant
bottle. Do not overfill. See “Adding Coolant” section for
additional information.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro-
tection of your engine which contains aluminum com-
ponents.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 335
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if
the “Brake Warning Light” indicates system failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when perform-
ing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to
the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are re-
placed. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak
and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information. Using the
wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your
brake system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
identified on the original factory installed hydraulic
master cylinder reservoir.
(Continued)
336 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylin-
der reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged brak-
ing, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-
mended fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor-
mance may be impaired by supplemental additives. There-
fore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 337
for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using transmission seal-
ers as they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check — Four-Speed Automatic
Transmission
Use the following procedure to check the transmission
fluid level properly:
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60
seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest of this
procedure.
3. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
pedal.
4. Place the gear selector momentarily into each gear
position (allowing time for the transmission to fully
engage in each position), ending with the transmission
in PARK.
5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to prevent dirt
from entering the transmission.
6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or
cold. You can also read the transmission fluid tempera-
ture using the instrument cluster. Refer to ⬙Instrument
Cluster Display⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel⬙ for further information. Hot fluid is approxi-
mately 180°F (82°C), which is the normal operating
temperature after the vehicle is driven at least 15 miles
(24 km). Hot fluid cannot be held comfortably between
the fingertips. Cold fluid is at a temperature of approxi-
mately 80°F (27°C).
7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert it until seated.
Then, remove the dipstick and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there
is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.
Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if
the actual level is at or above the hole.
• If the fluid is hot, the fluid level should be in the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper
two holes in the dipstick).
• If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD”.
338 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
If the fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick tube
to bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill. After adding
any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube, wait at least
two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission
before rechecking the fluid level.
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be be-
tween the two COLD (lower) holes on the dipstick with the
fluid at approximately 80°F (27°C). If the fluid level is
correctly established at 80°F (27°C), it should be between
the HOT (upper) reference holes when the transmission
reaches 180°F (82°C). Remember it is best to check the level
at the normal operating temperature.
8. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION!
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for fluid specifications.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Dirt and water in the transmission can cause serious
damage. To prevent dirt and water from entering the
transmission after checking or replenishing fluid,
make sure that the dipstick cap is re-seated properly.
Fluid Level Check — Six-Speed Automatic
Transmission
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmis-
sion filler tube is capped and no dipstick is provided. An
authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level
using a special service dipstick. If you notice fluid leakage
or transmission malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked.
Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can
cause severe transmission damage.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 339
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) – AWD Models Only
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information.
Fluid Level Check
Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If
leakage is detected, check the fluid level by removing the
fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between the
bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 inch (4 mm) below the fill
hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – AWD Models Only
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information.
Fluid Level Check
Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If
leakage is detected, check the fluid level by removing the
fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between the
bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 inch (4 mm) below the fill
hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
340 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to
an authorized dealer or service station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 341
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
342 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
–
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
–
⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
–
⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
–
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 343
EXAMPLE:
H = Speed Symbol
–
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under cer-
tain operating conditions
–
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating condi-
tions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
344 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
–
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards
and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
–
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
–
01 means the year 2001
–
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 345
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located be-
hind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. In-
flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressures.
346 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 347
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operat-
ing” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
348 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 349
350 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the rec-
ommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never over-
load them.
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 351
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tem-
perature changes.
352 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 353
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immedi-
ately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the
tire pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to be
reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run flat tire is
changed after driving with underinflated tire condition,
please replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to be
reused when driven under run flat mode (14 psi (96 kPa))
condition.
NOTE: TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa-
tion.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
354 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be re-
placed.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further
information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled
maintenance is highly recommended.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 355
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
NOTE: Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
356 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to steer-
ing, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can
cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering
and suspension components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi-
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when am-
bient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 357
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit stud-
ded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in “Starting
And Operating” for restrictions when towing with a spare
tire designated for temporary emergency use.
358 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collaps-
ible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 359
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
360 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are not hot to
the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 361
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent dam-
age to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equiva-
lent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This activ-
ity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY US-
ING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clear-
ance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Front Tires Only.
• Due to limited clearance, a P225/65R17 or 225/65R17
tire with a Peerless Super Z6 low profile traction device
or equivalent is recommended.
362 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
sive tread designs such as those on all season type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 363
The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation method
is the “forward cross” shown in the following diagram.
This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional
tires that must not be reversed.
The suggested All Wheel Drive (AWD) Tire rotation
method is the “rearward cross” shown in the following
diagram.
CAUTION!
Proper operation of All Wheel Drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to
the power transfer unit. Tire rotation schedule should
be followed to balance tire wear.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Tire Rotation
364 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manu-
facturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled condi-
tions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 365
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of
the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all pas-
senger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protec-
tion.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resis-
tance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
366 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 367
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts
from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
368 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 369
NOTE: If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer
more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and FCA recommends Mopar total care leather
cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery, as
damage to the upholstery may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning The Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent.
370 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
䡵 IDENTIFICATION DATA...................372
▫ Vehicle Identification Number .............372
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM ........................373
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .373
▫ Torque Specifications ....................374
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...................375
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ..................375
▫ Materials Added To Fuel .................375
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...............376
▫ Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . .376
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ......377
▫ MMT In Gasoline .......................377
▫ Fuel System Cautions ....................377
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...............378
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) ........378
▫ E-85 General Information .................378
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85)......................379
▫ Fuel Requirements .....................379
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles ..............380
▫ Starting .............................380
▫ Cruising Range ........................380
▫ Replacement Parts ......................380
▫ Maintenance ..........................380
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ......................381
䡵 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................382
▫ Engine ..............................382
▫ Chassis .............................384
9
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left front
corner of the instrument panel and is visible from outside
of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also
appears stamped on the right front door sill under the sill
moulding and printed on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the
vehicle registration and title.
The VIN is also stamped on either right or left hand side of
the engine block.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VIN Location
Stamped VIN Location
372 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will be
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during application and
greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle. In
addition, if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the
hydraulic system, the “Brake Warning Light” will turn on
as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylinder.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WARNING!
• Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your
full braking capacity in an emergency.
• Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light” on
is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking per-
formance or vehicle stability during braking may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or
will make your vehicle harder to control. You could
have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 373
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 Ft-Lbs
(135 N·m)
M12 x 1.5 19 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is
fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it half-
way).
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Torque Patterns
374 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
These engines are designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide opti-
mum fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded
“Regular” gasoline having a posted oc-
tane number of 87 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of higher
octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will not
provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these
engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifi-
cally blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 375
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When avail-
able, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent
gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
phragm materials.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
ates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illu-
minate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15%
ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
376 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed
Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso-
line blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
(Continued)
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 377
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of metha-
nol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
oxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY)
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded
Gasoline Only and/or a yellow fuel cap. Please refer to the
other sections of this manual for information on features
that are common between Flexible Fuel and Non-Flexible
Fuel powered vehicles.
378 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a
yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking
materials lit or products that can cause spark in or near
the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas
cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning
agent and never use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating greater than 87
(R+M)/2, or solely E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating be-
tween E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
When switching fuel types:
• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least
5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard start-
ing and/or driveability problems during warm up.
NOTE:
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
rough idle following start up may be experienced even if
the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline addi-
tive, such as Mopar Injector Cleanup or Techron may be
used.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 379
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated
engine oils. These special requirements are included in
Mopar engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting FCA US
Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended that engine
oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of
Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395 contains
additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet
testing, to provide additional protection to FCA US LLC
engines.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time it
takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and a
deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until
the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than
gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be experi-
enced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per liter and
the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%,
compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
Ethanol compatible service components are required.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may
affect drivability.
380 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models 20.5 Gallons 77.6 Liters
All-Wheel Drive Models 21.1 Gallons 79.8 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 4.5 Quarts 4.26 Liters
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System*
2.4L Engine and Single or Dual-Zone Climate Control System (Mopar
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
8 Quarts 7.5 Liters
2.4L Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System (Mopar
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
10 Quarts 9.5 Liters
3.6L Engine and Single or Dual-Zone Climate Control System (Mopar
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
13.1 Quarts 12.4 Liters
3.6L Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System (Mopar
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
14.5 Quarts 13.7 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 381
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Tech-
nology).
Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer
to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E-85) Engine – If
Equipped
87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
382 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam-
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 383
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Failure to use ATF+4 fluid may affect the function or per-
formance of your transmission.
We recommend Mopar ATF+4 fluid.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) We recommend you use Mopar Gear Lubricant 75W-90.
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) We recommend you use Mopar Gear Lubricant 75W-90.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use Mopar Power Steering Fluid + 4,
or Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
384 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MULTIMEDIA
CONTENTS
䡵 UCONNECT SYSTEMS ...................387
䡵 CYBERSECURITY .......................387
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ...................388
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Radio 4.3
Settings ..............................388
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Settings ...............400
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED ............................414
▫ Radio Operation........................414
▫ Media Mode ..........................414
䡵 IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL ................415
䡵 UCONNECT MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)
— IF EQUIPPED ........................415
▫ Getting Started.........................415
▫ Single Video Screen .....................416
▫ Play Video Games ......................416
▫ Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While
A Video Is Playing On Channel 1 ...........417
▫ Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio .....417
▫ VES Remote Control — If Equipped .........418
▫ Remote Control Storage ..................420
▫ Locking The Remote Control ...............421
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries .......421
▫ Important Notes For Single Video Screen
System ..............................421
▫ VES Headphones Operation ...............422
▫ Controls .............................422
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries ..........423
▫ Accessibility ..........................423
10
▫ Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty. . .424
▫ System Information .....................424
䡵 UCONNECT PHONE (4.3) .................431
▫ Radio 4.3.............................431
▫ Operation ............................433
▫ Phone Call Features .....................438
▫ Uconnect Phone Features .................442
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity .............445
▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone ...............................445
▫ General Information ....................449
䡵 UCONNECT PHONE (UCONNECT 3/3 NAV) . . .449
▫ Operation ............................452
▫ Phone Call Features .....................460
▫ Uconnect Phone Features .................464
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity .............467
▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone ...............................468
▫ General Information .....................479
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .479
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information ..........480
䡵 VOICE COMMAND (UCONNECT 3/3 NAV) . . . .481
▫ Uconnect 3/3 NAV......................481
▫ Uconnect Voice Commands ................483
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ............493
386 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect system,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE: Uconnect screen images are for illustration pur-
poses only and may not reflect exact software for your
vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa-
tion. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com-
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav-
ior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
10
MULTIMEDIA 387
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly
regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/support/
software-update.html (U.S. Residents) or www.driveu-
connect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
able Uconnect software updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept infor-
mation and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allows you to access
and change the customer programmable features.
Customer Programmable Features — Radio 4.3
Settings
In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features that may be equipped such as Dis-
play, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors &
Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Op-
tions, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, and Sirius
Setup through buttons on the faceplate and touchscreen.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
Radio 4.3 Buttons On The Faceplate and Touchscreen
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
388 MULTIMEDIA
Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate to access the
Settings screen, use the “Page Up”/“Page Down” buttons
on the touchscreen to scroll through the following settings.
Press the desired setting button on the touchscreen to
change the setting using the description shown on the
following pages for each setting.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Brightness +–
NOTE:
The “Brightness” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on
the touchscreen.
Mode Day Night Auto
Language English Français Español
NOTE:
When in the “Language” feature, you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature, including the
trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped).
Units US Metric
Voice Response Brief Long
Touchscreen Beep On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 389
Clock
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time and Format 12 hr 24 hr
AM PM
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the
correct time.
Show Time Status — If Equipped On Off
Sync Time — If Equipped On Off
390 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Rear Park Assist — If
Equipped
Off Sound Only Sound & Display
NOTE:
The Rear Park Assist system scans for, and then alerts the driver of, objects behind the vehicle when the transmission
gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h).
ParkView Backup Camera On Off
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of
the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above
the rear license plate.
Hill Start Assist — If
Equipped
On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 391
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay — If Equipped 0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
Headlights With Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
Headlight Illuminated Approach 0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the doors
are unlocked with the key fob.
Auto High Beams — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Automatic High Beam Headlamps” is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate auto-
matically under certain conditions.
392 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Daytime Running Lights Yes No
Steering Directed Lights — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Steering Directed Lights” feature is selected, the headlights will turn relative to a change in direction of
the steering wheel.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
The “Auto Door Locks” feature locks all doors automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the trans-
mission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Sound Horn With Lock On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 393
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sound Horn With Remote Start On Off
Passive Entry (Keyless Enter-N-Go)
— If Equipped
On Off
Remote Door Unlock Order Driver All
NOTE:
When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button, you
must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All” is selected, all of the doors
will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock
when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening
once. If the driver’s door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use the
key fob).
394 MULTIMEDIA
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated Seat &
Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start—
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel (if equipped) will automatically turn
on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Engine Off Power Delay 0 sec 45 sec
5 min 10 min
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system
(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
up to ten minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
10
MULTIMEDIA 395
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
Compass Settings
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Compass
Variance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
NOTE:
When the “Compass Variance” feature is selected, it allows the compass variance to be set to any number from 1 to
15 per the compass variance zone map figure.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differ-
ences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map. Once
properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide the most
accurate compass headings.
396 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Compass
Calibration
Yes
NOTE:
Press “Compass Calibration” on the touchscreen to enter calibration. To start calibration of the compass, press the
“Yes” button on the touchscreen and complete one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or me-
tallic objects). A message will appear on the touchscreen when the compass has been successfully calibrated.
Keep magnetic materials away from the rear view mirror, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops, and Radar Detectors. This
is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false
readings.
Compass Variance Zone Map
10
MULTIMEDIA 397
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
Balance/Fade Up Arrow
Button
Down Arrow
Button
Left Arrow
Button
Right
Arrow Button
Center “C”
Button
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the “Arrow” button on the touch-
screen to adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the “Center ‘C’ Button”
on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Music Info Cleanup On Off
NOTE:
The “Music Info Cleanup” feature helps organize music files for optimized music navigation.
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
398 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Sirius Setup
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
10
MULTIMEDIA 399
Setting Name Selectable Options
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 3/3
NAV Settings
Press the “More” button on the touchscreen, then press the
“Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows
you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Clock, Safety & Driving Assis-
tance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote
Start, Engine Off Options, Compass Settings, Audio,
Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, and Accessibility.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or press
the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on
the touchscreen on the right side of the screen will allow
you to toggle up or down through the available settings.
400 MULTIMEDIA
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Day Night Auto
Display Brightness With
Headlights ON
–+
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display Brightness With
Headlights OFF
–+
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Set Language On Off
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Espa-
ñol) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set
Language” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
10
MULTIMEDIA 401
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions appears in the instru-
ment cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Fuel Saver Display In Clus-
ter — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Fuel Saver Display In Cluster” feature turns the “ECO” message on and off in the instrument cluster display.
Control Screen Time-Out —
If Equipped
On Off
402 MULTIMEDIA
Clock
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off
Set Time Hours -+
NOTE:
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be un-
checked.
Set Time Minutes -+
NOTE:
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be un-
checked.
Time Format 12hrs 24hrs
Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 403
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Rear Park Assist — If
Equipped
Off Sound Only Sounds & Display
NOTE:
The Rear Park Assist system scans for, and then alerts the driver of, objects behind the vehicle when the transmission
gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h).
Park Assist Volume Low Med High
ParkView Backup Camera On Off
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of
the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above
the rear license plate.
Hill Start Assist — If
Equipped
On Off
404 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
Headlights With Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
Headlight Illuminated On Approach 0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time
the headlights remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
Auto Dim High Beams— If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights activate/deactivate automatically
under certain conditions.
Daytime Running Lights — If On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 405
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equipped
Steering Directed Headlights — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Steering Directed Headlights” feature causes the headlights to turn relative to a change in direction of the steer-
ing wheel.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
12 mph (20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
406 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sound Horn With Lock On Off
Sound Horn With Remote Start On Off
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the key fob unlock button. You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob
unlock button. If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no mat-
ter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is pro-
grammed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of
Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s
door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can
be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the key fob
lock or unlock buttons.
10
MULTIMEDIA 407
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated Seat &
Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start—
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel (if equipped) will automatically turn
ON when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).
Sound Horn With Remote Start On Off
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Engine Off Power Delay 0 sec 45 sec
5 mins 10 mins
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system
(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
up to ten minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
408 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay -+
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off. Press the “+” or “-” buttons to transition from 0 seconds to 30, 60, or 90 sec-
onds.
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE: Before compass calibration is performed, the compass variance zone should be set for best results.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Compass Variance 123456789101112131415
NOTE:
When the “Compass Variance” feature is selected, it allows the compass variance to be set to any number from 1 to
15 per the compass variance zone map figure.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differ-
ences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map. Once
properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide the most
accurate compass headings.
10
MULTIMEDIA 409
Setting Name Selectable Options
Perform Compass
Calibration
Start
NOTE:
To start calibration of the compass, press the “Start” button on the touchscreen and complete one or more 360-degree
turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects). A message will appear on the touchscreen when the com-
pass has been successfully calibrated.
Keep magnetic materials away from the rear view mirror, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops, and Radar Detectors. This
is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false
readings.
Compass Variance Zone Map
410 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
Balance/Fade Front But-
ton
Rear Arrow
Button
Left Arrow
Button
Right
Arrow
Button
Center “C”
Button
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the “Arrow” button on the touch-
screen to adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the “Center ‘C’ Button”
on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Music Info Cleanup On Off
NOTE:
The “Music Info Cleanup” feature helps organize music files for optimized music navigation.
10
MULTIMEDIA 411
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Play On Off
NOTE: When the “Auto Play” feature is on, music will begin playing music automatically whenever an audio device
is connected and recognized.
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Devices List of Paired Devices
NOTE:
This feature shows which devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup
After pressing the “SIRIUS Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
412 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Accessibility — If Equipped
After pressing the “Accessibility” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Accessibility On Off
NOTE:
The “Accessibility” feature announces a function prior to performing the action selected when using DVD functions,
when it is activated. For example, when activated, and the “Play” button is selected, the system will announce “Play
button selected”, and then once pressed again the “Play” button will perform its action.
10
MULTIMEDIA 413
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch increases the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
rocker switch decreases the volume.
Pushing the center button makes the radio switch between
the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM or Media etc.)
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-
button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is
different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
“Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next track on
the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth). Pushing the
bottom of the switch once goes to the beginning of the
current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it
is within eight seconds after the current track begins to
play.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
414 MULTIMEDIA
IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL
This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and
iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully
support the iPod control features. Please visit Apple’s
website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
UCONNECT MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES) — IF EQUIPPED
Your rear seat Video Entertainment System (VES) is de-
signed to give your family years of enjoyment. You can
play your favorite CDs or DVDs, listen to audio over the
wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of stan-
dard video games or audio devices. Please review this
Owner’s Manual to become familiar with its features and
operation.
NOTE: The screen is located in the 2nd row overhead
console.
Getting Started
• Screen located in the overhead console: Unfold the
overhead LCD screen by pushing the button on the
overhead console behind the screen.
• With the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position, turn
the radio on by pushing the ON/OFF Volume Control
knob.
• When the Video Screen is open and a DVD is inserted
into the radio, the screen turns on automatically, the
headphone transmitters turn on and playback begins.
Overhead Video Screen
10
MULTIMEDIA 415
Single Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Video Entertainment System (VES).
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA
input jacks located on the back of the center console.
Audio/Video RCA Jacks (AUX Jacks) on the rear of the
center console enable the monitor to display video directly
from a video camera, connect video games for display on
the screen, or play music directly from an MP3 player.
1. Video in (yellow).
2. Left audio in (white).
3. Right audio in (red).
When connecting an external source to the AUX input, be
sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES jacks:
NOTE: Certain high-end video games consoles will ex-
ceed the power limit of the vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer
to the Power Inverter section within “Internal Equipment”
in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle”.
Ensure the remote control channel selector switch and
Headphone switch (IR channel) are the same number.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the MODE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES AUX 2,
by either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
repeatedly pushing the MODE button, then push EN-
TER on the Remote Control.
Auxiliary RCA Input Jacks
416 MULTIMEDIA
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Press the “MORE” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Rear Entertainment” button on the touch-
screen to display the Rear Entertainment Controls.
3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, press the
“Power” button on the touchscreen.
4. Press the “1” or “2” button on the touchscreen for the
channel desired and press the “Source” button on the
touchscreen to select the desired mode.
Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A
Video Is Playing On Channel 1
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 2.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the MODE button on the Remote Control and the
Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is
playing then only a small banner will appear on the
bottom of the screen.
2. While looking at the video screen, either press Up/
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight
the desired audio source or repeatedly push the MODE
button on the remote until the desired audio source
appears on the screen.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Press the “MORE” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Rear Entertainment” button on the touch-
screen to display the Rear Entertainment Controls.
3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, press the
“Power” button on the touchscreen.
4. Press the “1” or “2” button on the touchscreen for the
channel desired and press the “Source” button on the
touchscreen to select the desired mode.
Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio
Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio auto-
matically selects the appropriate mode after the disc is
recognized and displays the menu screen or starts playing
the first track.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the MODE button on the Remote Control.
10
MULTIMEDIA 417
2. While looking at the Video Screen, highlight DISC by
either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
repeatedly pushing the MODE button, then push EN-
TER.
NOTE:
• The VES system will retain the last setting when turned
off.
• Viewing a DVD on the Touchscreen radio screen is not
available in some regions or locations, the vehicle must
be stopped, and the gear selector must be in the PARK
position. Refer to local and state laws.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Press the “MORE” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Rear Entertainment” button on the touch-
screen to display the Rear Entertainment Controls.
3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, press the
“Power” button on the touchscreen.
4. Press the “1” or “2” button on the touchscreen for the
channel desired and press the “Source” button on the
touchscreen to select the desired mode.
VES Remote Control — If Equipped
Controls And Indicators
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
audio while the screen is closed, push the Power button
to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is pushed,
the currently affected channel or channel button is
illuminated momentarily.
VES Remote Control
418 MULTIMEDIA
3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or off.
The remote backlighting turns off automatically after
five seconds.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch – Indicates which chan-
nel is being controlled by the remote control. When the
selector switch is in the Channel 1 position, the remote
controls the functionality of headphone Channel 1 (right
side of the screen). When the selector switch is in the
Channel 2, position the remote controls the functionality
of headphone Channel 2 (left side of the screen).
5. 䉴䉴 – In radio modes, push to seek the next tunable
station. In disc modes, push and hold to fast forward
through the current audio track or video chapter. In
menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
6. 䉲 / Prev – In radio modes, push to select to the previous
station. In disc modes, push to advance to the start of the
current or previous audio track or video chapter. In
menu modes, use to navigate in the menu.
7. MENU – Push to return to the main menu of a DVD
disc, to select an audio or video channel from the Station
list, or select playback modes (SCAN/RANDOM for a
CD).
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
9.
(Stop) – Stops disc play.
10. PROG Up/Down – When listening to a radio mode,
pushing PROG Up selects the next preset and pushing
PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in the
radio.
11. Mute – Push to mute the headphone audio output for
the selected channel.
12. SLOW – Push to slow playback of a DVD disc. Push
play (䉴) to resume normal play.
13. STATUS – Push to display the current status.
14. MODE – Push to change the mode of the selected
channel. See the Mode Selection section of this manual
for details on changing modes.
15. SETUP – When in a video mode, push the SETUP
button to access the display settings (see the display
settings section) to access the DVD setup menu, select
the menu button on the radio. When a disc is loaded in
the DVD player (if equipped) and the VES mode is
selected and the disc is stopped, push the SETUP
button to access the DVD Setup menu. (see the DVD
Setup Menu of this manual.)
10
MULTIMEDIA 419
16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, push to
return to the previous screen. When navigating a DVDs
disc menu, the operation depends on the disc’s con-
tents.
17. 䉳䉳 – In radio modes, push to seek to the previous
tunable station. In disc modes, push and hold to fast
rewind through the current audio track or video chap-
ter. In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
18. ENTER – Push to select the highlighted option in a
menu.
19. 䉱 / NEXT – In radio modes, push to select to the next
station. In disc modes, push to advance to the next
audio track or video chapter. In menu modes, use to
navigate in the menu.
Remote Control Storage
The video screen comes with a built in storage compart-
ment for the remote control which is accessible when the
screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index
finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do not try
to pull the remote straight down as it will be very difficult
to remove. To return the remote back into its storage area,
insert one long edge of the remote into the two retaining
clips first, and then rotate the remote back up into the other
two retaining clips until it snaps back into position.
VES Remote Control Storage
420 MULTIMEDIA
Locking The Remote Control
All remote control functionality can be disabled as a
parental control feature.
1. Press the “MORE” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Rear Entertainment” button on the touch-
screen to display the Rear Entertainment Controls.
3. Press the “Lock-out” button on the touchscreen to lock
the remote control. Pressing the “Lock-out” button on
the touchscreen a second time will unlock the remote
control.
NOTE: Remote control lock-out will only apply to the
current ignition cycle. The VES will automatically remove
the lock-out if the ignition is cycled to “OFF”.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for opera-
tion. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them ac-
cording to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Important Notes For Single Video Screen System
• VES is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio
simultaneously.
• In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1
and right side equates to Channel 2.
• If a video source is selected on Channel 1, then Channel
2 is for audio only.
• When selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video
will display on the screen and the audio will be heard on
Channel 1 in the headphones.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even when
the Video Screen is closed.
10
MULTIMEDIA 421
VES Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down position
and that the channel is not muted and the headphone
channel selector switch is on the desired channel. If audio
is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries are
installed in the headphones.
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system is
turned off.
VES Headphones
1 — Volume Control
2 — Power Button
3 — Channel Selection Switch
4 — Power Indicator
422 MULTIMEDIA
Changing The Audio Mode For Headphones
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone selector
switch.
NOTE:
• When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is
controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned to
the audio of the VES Channel 1.
• When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is
controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned to
the audio of the VES Channel 2.
2. Push the MODE button on the remote control.
3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such as
a DVD Video), pushing STATUS shows the status on a
popup banner at the bottom of the screen. Pushing the
MODE button will advance to the next mode. When the
mode is in an audio only source (such as FM), the Mode
Selection menu appears on screen.
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen, use
the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate to
the available modes and push the ENTER button to
select the new mode.
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, push the
BACK button on the remote control.
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
operation. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover down-
ward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them ac-
cording to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Accessibility
Accessibility is a feature of the DVD system that announces
a function prior to performing the action. The first time a
button is pressed the system will identify the button, and
will enact the function of the button the second time it is
pressed. For further information refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia.”
10
MULTIMEDIA 423
Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers the
initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this particular
Aptiv PLC (“Aptiv”) wireless headphone (⬙Product⬙). The
warranty is not transferable.
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts as
long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal use
is defective in workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty does
not cover any damage or defect that results from misuse,
abuse or modification of the Product other than by Aptiv.
Foam earpieces, which will wear over time through normal
use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam is
available for a nominal charge). APTIV IS NOT LIABLE
FOR ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR
PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY
FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS AP-
TIV LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEM-
PLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY
KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and
jurisdictions may not allow the exclusion or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, so the above limita-
tion may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific
legal rights. You may also have other rights, which vary
from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Will Aptiv Do? Aptiv, at its option, will repair or
replace any defective Product. Aptiv reserves the right to
replace any discontinued Product with a comparable
model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY
FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS, AND IS
IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY FOR MER-
CHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-
POSE.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Aptiv wireless headphones, please email
[email protected] or phone:
888-293-3332
System Information
Shared Modes
This allows the VES to output radio sources to the head-
phones and the radio to output VES sources to the vehicle
speakers.
When the radio and VES channel 1 or 2 are in the
424 MULTIMEDIA
same (shared) mode, a VES icon will be visible on the
radio’s display for that channel, and the shared icon will be
visible on the VES screen. When in shared mode, the same
audio source is heard in the shared headphone channel 1 or
channel 2.
If the radio functions (FM, AM, or SAT) are in the shared
mode with the VES, only the radio is able to control the
radio functions. In this case, VES can share the radio mode,
but not change stations until the radio mode is changed to
a mode that is different from the VES selected radio mode.
When shared, the radio has priority for all radio modes
(FM, AM). The VES has the ability to switch tuner (AM/
FM), SEEK, TUNE, and recall presets in radio modes as
long as it is not in shared mode.
When in shared disc both the radio and the VES have
control of the video functions. The VES has the ability to
control the following video modes:
NOTE:
• CD: Ability to Fast Forward, Rewind, and Track Up/
Down.
The VES can even control radio modes or video modes
while the radio is turned off. The VES can access the radio
modes or disc modes by navigating to those modes on the
VES and activating a radio mode or disc mode.
Information Mode Display
When information mode is active, the current mode setting
for both audio channels is displayed. In addition to the
items called out by number, the remaining information
displays the current status of the source (such as station
frequency, name, preset or track number, song title, artist
name, album name, etc.).
Information Mode Display
10
MULTIMEDIA 425
1. Channel 1 Mode — Displays the current source for
Channel 1.
2. Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute — Audio: The audio only
icon is not used on Channel 1, in a single screen system.
Mute: when the Mute icon is displayed, the audio for
Channel 1 has been muted using the remote control’s
MUTE button.
3. Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute — Audio: Only in a single
screen system: The audio only icon is displayed on
Channel 2 when Channel 1 is in a video mode. Mute:
when the Mute icon is displayed, the audio for Channel
2 has been muted using the remote control’s MUTE
button.
4. Channel 2 Mode — Displays the current source for
Channel 2.
5. Remote Locked Out — When the icon is displayed, the
remote control functions are disabled.
6. Clock — Displays the time.
7. Channel 1 Shared Status — When the icon is displayed,
the audio for Channel 1 is also shared with the radio and
playing through the cabin speakers.
Numeric Keypad Menu
When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2 shows
DIRECT TUNE, pushing the remote control’s ENTER but-
ton activates a numeric keypad menu. This screen makes it
easy to enter a specific tuner frequency or track number. To
enter the desired digit:
1. Push the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲, 䉴,
䉳) to navigate to the desired digit.
Numeric Keypad Menu
426 MULTIMEDIA
2. When the digit is highlighted, push the remote control’s
ENTER button to select the digit. Repeat these steps
until all digits are entered.
3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button and
push the remote control’s ENTER button.
4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go
button and push the remote control’s ENTER button.
Station List Menu
When listening to an audio channel, pushing the remote
control’s MENU button displays a list of all available
channels. Navigate this list using the remote control’s
navigation buttons to find the desired station, push the
remote control’s ENTER button to tune to that station. To
jump through the list more quickly, navigate to the Page
Up and Page Down icons on the screen.
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pushing
the remote control’s MENU button displays a list of all
commands which control playback of the disc. Using the
options you can activate or cancel Random play.
Options Menu
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc
in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pressing the “Options”
button on the touchscreen activates the Options Settings
menu. From this menu you can adjust Audio, Subtitles,
Angle and Title.
Display Settings
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc
in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pushing the remote con-
trol’s SETUP button activates the Display Settings menu.
These settings control the appearance of the video on the
screen. The factory default settings are already set for
optimum viewing, so there is no need to change these
settings under normal circumstances.
10
MULTIMEDIA 427
To change the settings, push the remote control’s naviga-
tion buttons to select an item, then push the remote
control’s navigation buttons to change the value for the
currently selected item. To reset all values back to the
original settings, select the Default Settings menu option
and push the remote control’s ENTER button.
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
screen closed:
1. Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
2. Close the video screen.
3. To change the current audio mode, push the remote
control’s MODE button. This will automatically select
the next available audio mode without using the
MODE/SOURCE Select menu.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, push the
remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If audio is
still not heard, check that fully charged batteries are
installed in the headphones.
Disc Formats
The DVD player is capable of playing the following types
of discs (8 cm or 12 cm diameter):
• DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see
notes about DVD Region Codes)
• Audio Compact Discs (CDs)
• CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio
format files
• Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)
Display Settings Menu
428 MULTIMEDIA
DVD Region Codes
The DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in order
for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD disc does
not match the region code for the player, the disc will stop
playing and a warning will be displayed.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the DVD player, the
DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by default (most
DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title, but the Video title
is ignored). All multi-channel program material is auto-
matically mixed down to two channels, which may result
in a lowered apparent volume level. If you increase the
volume level to account for this change in level, remember
to lower the volume before changing the disc or to another
mode.
Recorded Discs
The DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs re-
corded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a CD-ROM
containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will also play
DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R, DVD-RW and
DVD-ROM discs.
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the DVD player may not be able to play
some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a compat-
ible format and is playable on other players. To help avoid
playback problems, use the following guidelines when
recording discs.
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are closed
are playable.
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD-
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
each track number is unique.
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the ISO-
9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or UDF format. CD-DA
may also be used for PCM Audio contained on CD-
Based Data.
• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play the
Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is playable
in the DVD player, check with the disc recording software
publisher for more information about burning playable
discs.
10
MULTIMEDIA 429
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
(CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R and DVD-RW) is with a permanent
marker. Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate
from the disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage
to the DVD player.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3, WMA AND ACC)
The DVD player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3 with data bitrates from 32 to 320 kbit/s, including
variable bit rates), WMA (All Standard 8.x, 9.x Windows
Media Audio) and ACC (MPEG-4 audio; sampling fre-
quencies 8 to 48 kHz; mono and stereo) audio files with the
from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW).
• The DVD player always uses the file extension to
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙, WMA files
must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or ⬙WMA⬙,
and ACC files must end with the extensions “.acc” or
“.m4a”. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use these
extensions for any other types of files.
• For MP3 files, ID3 tag data v1, v1.1, v2 and v2.4 (such as
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those down-
loaded from many online music stores) will not play. The
DVD player will automatically skip the file and begin
playing the next available file.
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro, Ogg
Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD player will
automatically skip the file and begin playing the next
available file.
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
supported. For both formats, the recommended sample
rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
• To change the current file, use the remote control’s or
DVD player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next file, or the
䉲 button to return to the start of the current or previous
file.
• To change the current directory, use the remote control’s
PROG UP and Down buttons or Rewind/skip back and
fast fwd/skip forward.
430 MULTIMEDIA
Disc Errors
If the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc Error⬙
message is displayed on the Radio display and the disc is
automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible
disc format are all potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙
message.
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD player
will attempt to continue playing the disc by skipping
forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end of the disc
is reached, the DVD player will return to the beginning of
the disc and attempt to play the start of the first track.
The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot
conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior temperature
is above 120°F (49°C). When this occurs, the DVD player
will display ⬙High Temp⬙ and will shut off the display until
a safe temperature is reached. This shutdown is necessary
to protect the optics of the DVD player.
Product Agreement
This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual
property rights. Use of this copyright protection technol-
ogy must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended
for home or other limited viewing uses otherwise autho-
rized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly
is prohibited.
Dolby Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured un-
der license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby,⬙⬙MLP Loss-
less,⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works. Copyright
1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
UCONNECT PHONE (4.3)
Radio 4.3
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle
communications system. Uconnect Phone allows you to
dial a phone number with your mobile phone.
Uconnect Phone supports the following features:
Voice Activated Features:
• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mobile”
or, “Dial 248-555-1212”)
• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”)
• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call Back”)
10
MULTIMEDIA 431
• View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls,” “Show
Outgoing calls,” “Show missed Calls,” “Show Recent
Calls”)
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
Smith Mobile”)
Screen Activated Features:
• Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis-
played on the touchscreen
• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs
• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the
touchscreen
• Pairing up to ten phones/audio devices for easy access
to connect to them quickly
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect Customer Support:
• U.S. residents – visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-
855-8400.
• Canadian Residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call,
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
If your mobile phone only supports the Headset Profile
you may not be able to use any Uconnect Phone features.
Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manu-
facturer for details.
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only in
safe driving conditions following all applicable laws,
including laws regarding phone use. Your attention
should be focused on safely operating the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a collision causing
serious injury or death.
432 MULTIMEDIA
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features
Bluetooth technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other with-
out wires or a docking station, so Uconnect Phone works
no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your
purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned
on and has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect Phone.
The Uconnect Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or
audio devices to be linked to the system. Only one linked
(or paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
Uconnect Phone Button
The Uconnect Phone
Button is used to enter
the phone mode and make calls, show recent,
incoming, outgoing calls, view phonebook
etc., When you press the button you will hear
a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.
Uconnect Voice Command Button
The Uconnect Voice Command
Button is
only used for “barge in” and when you are
already in a call and you want to send Tones or
make another call.
The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s
audio system. The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be
adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from
the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so
equipped.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two general methods
for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mo-
bile.”
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
guided through the available options.
10
MULTIMEDIA 433
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
prompt.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
“John Smith” and then “mobile,” the following com-
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith mobile.”
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound command form of the voice command is
given. You can also break the commands into parts and
say each part of the command when you are asked for it.
For example, you can use the compound command form
voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you can
break the compound command form into two voice
commands: “Search Contact” and when asked “John
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect Phone works
best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if
speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away
from you.
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Lan-
guage Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah” and
“eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I would
like to.”
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or
sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly Smith.”
For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the
system identifies the topic or context and provides the
associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do you want to
call?” in the case where a phone call was requested but the
specific name was not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pushing
the “Voice Command”
button on your steering wheel.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep.
434 MULTIMEDIA
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push the
Phone
button (if active) on your steering wheel and
say a command or say “help.” All Uconnect Phone
sessions begin with a push of the VR button or the
Phone
button (if active) on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also push the VR button
or Phone button
(if active) on your steering wheel when the system is
listening for a command and be returned to the main or
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair your
compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect web-
site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
NOTE:
• You must have Bluetooth enabled on your phone to
complete this procedure.
• The vehicle must be in PARK.
1. You can do either of the following:
a. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate, page
down to the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touch-
screen, press it and you see the Paired Phones screen.
If there are no paired phones you will see <Empty>
as the first device name.
b. Push the MORE button on the faceplate, then press
the “Phone” button on the touchscreen and you will
go to the Uconnect Phone main screen. Press the
“Settings” button on the touchscreen. If there are no
phones currently paired a pop-up appears. If you
select Yes, you go the Paired Phones screen, if you
select No, you return to the Uconnect Phone main
menu.
2. At the Paired Phones screen press the “Add Device”
button on the touchscreen and a pop-up with instruc-
tions appears.
3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled
mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, select the
“Uconnect” device and enter the PIN.
10
MULTIMEDIA 435
4. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system prompts you to choose whether or not this is
your favorite phone. Selecting Yes makes this phone the
highest priority. This phone takes precedence over other
paired phones within range.
NOTE: Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect
system may interfere with the Bluetooth connection. If this
happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However, first,
make sure to delete the device from the list of phones on
your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove Uconnect
from the list of devices in your phone’s Bluetooth settings.
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device
1. Push the PLAYER button on the faceplate to begin.
2. Press the “Source” button on the touchscreen.
3. Change the Source to Bluetooth.
4. Press the “Add Device” button on the touchscreen.
5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled
Audio Device. When prompted on the device, select the
“Uconnect” device and enter the PIN.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while
the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make this
device the highest priority. This device will take prece-
dence over other paired devices within range.
NOTE: If No is selected, device priority is determined by
the order in which it was paired. The latest device paired
will have the higher priority.
You can also use the following VR command to bring up a
list of paired audio devices.
• “Show Paired Audio Devices.”
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio
Device
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest
priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within range.
If you need to choose a particular Phone or Audio Device
follow these steps:
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate.
2. Press the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen.
3. Press to select the particular Phone or the “Phone/
Audio” button on the touchscreen and then an Audio
Device.
436 MULTIMEDIA
4. At the Options pop-up screen press the “Connect De-
vice” button on the touchscreen.
5. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate.
2. Press the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen.
3. Select the Phone or Audio Device.
4. At the Options pop-up screen press the “Disconnect
Device” button on the touchscreen.
5. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate.
2. Press the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen.
3. Select the Phone or Audio Device.
4. At the Options pop-up screen press the “Delete Device”
button on the touchscreen.
5. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate.
2. Press the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen.
3. Select a different Phone or Audio Device then the
currently connected device.
4. At the Options pop-up screen press the “Make Favorite”
button on the touchscreen; you will see the chosen
device move to the top of the list.
5. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect
website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.
• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book,
follow the procedure in the Voice Recognition Quick
Reference section.
10
MULTIMEDIA 437
• Automatic download and update of a phone book, if
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless
phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone, for
example, after you start the vehicle.
• A maximum of 2,000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to
the Uconnect Phone.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available,
the previously downloaded phonebook is available for
use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or de-
leted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be edited
on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connec-
tion.
Emergency And Towing Assistance
The 911/Help numbers can only be altered. These can not
be deleted or the names can not be changed.
To change the 911/Help number, follow these steps:
1. Press the “Phonebook” button on the touchscreen from
the Phone main screen.
2. Press the “911/Help” button on the touchscreen. Press
the appropriate listing to alter, Emergency for example.
3. Once Emergency is pressed, the “Edit” button on the
touchscreen appears. Press the “Edit” button on the
touchscreen and you will be given the choice to Edit
Number or Reset to Default.
4. Follow the on-screen prompts to complete the task.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be ac-
cessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with your
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call
with Uconnect Phone.
• Redial
438 MULTIMEDIA
• Dial by pressing in the number
• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Number, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back)
• Mobile Phonebook
• Recent Call Log
NOTE: All of the above operations except Redial can be
done with one call or less active.
Dial By Saying A Number
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial 248-555-1212.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial 248-555-1212.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
1. Push the “VR” button on your steering wheel to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Call John Doe Mobile.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
features:
• Answer
• End
• Ignore
• Hold/unhold
• Mute/unmute
• Transfer the call to/from the phone
• Swap two active calls
• Join two active calls together
Touch-Tone Number Entry
1. Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Dial” button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreen to enter
the number and press “Call.”
10
MULTIMEDIA 439
To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), push
the Voice Command
button while in a call and say
“1234#” or you can say “Send Voicemail Password” if
Voicemail password is stored in your mobile phone-
book.
Recent Calls
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
• Incoming Calls
• Outgoing Calls
• Missed Calls
• All Calls
These can be accessed by touching the recent calls button
on the touchscreen on the Phone main screen.
You can also push the Phone
button and say “Show
my incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming
calls will be displayed.
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing”,
“Recent” or “Missed.”
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if
on, and will display a pop-up showing Answer or Ignore.
Press the Answer button on the touchscreen or push the
Phone
button on the steering wheel to accept the call.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Uconnect Phone will then interrupt the
vehicle audio system, if on, and will display a pop-up
showing Answer, Ignore or Transfer. Push the Phone
button to place the current call on hold and answer
the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
440 MULTIMEDIA
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
push the Voice Command
button and say “Dial” or
“Call” followed by the phone number or phonebook
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold
while the second call is in progress. Or you can place a
call on hold by pressing the “Hold” button on the
touchscreen, then dial a number from the dialpad,
recent calls or from the phonebooks. To go back to the
first call, refer to “Toggling Between Calls” in this
section. To combine two calls, refer to “Join Calls” in this
section.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
push the Phone
button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time. Also you can press the “Swap” button on the
touchscreen, on the Phone main screen.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the “Join Calls” button on the Phone main
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the “End”
button on the touchscreen or the Phone
button. Only
the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call
on hold, it will become the new active call. If the active
call is terminated by the far end, a call on hold may not
become active automatically. This is cell phone-
dependent.
Redial
1. Press the “Redial” button on the touchscreen, or push
the Phone
button and after the “Listening” prompt
and the following beep, say “Redial.”
2. The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was
dialed from your mobile phone.
10
MULTIMEDIA 441
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF.
• After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can continue
on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends, or until
the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call
on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the
mobile phone.
Uconnect Phone Features
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Emergency” and the Uconnect Phone will instruct
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
• The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of
successfully making a phone call as to that for the
mobile phone directly.
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations, when the mobile phone has
network coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect
Phone.
442 MULTIMEDIA
Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
If you need roadside/towing assistance:
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Roadside Assistance” or say “Towing Assistance.”
NOTE: The roadside/towing assistance number dialed is
based on the country where the vehicle is purchased
(1-800-521-2779 for U.S., 1-800-363-4869 for Canada, 55-14-
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the FCA US LLC
24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage details in the
Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24-Hour Road-
side Assistance Card.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems.”
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to push numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service or
automated customer service line. Some services require
immediate response selection. In some instances, that may
be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on
your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the touchscreen
or push the Voice Command
button and say the word
“Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For ex-
ample, if required to enter your PIN followed with a
pound, (3746#),youcanpush the Voice Command
button and say, “Send3746#.”Saying “Send”
followed by a number, or sequence of numbers, is also
to be used for navigating through an automated cus-
tomer service center menu structure, and to leave a
number on a pager.
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phone-
book entry and/or Last Name as “Voice Password,” then if
you push the Voice Command
button and say “Send
Voicemail Password,” the Uconnect Phone will then
10
MULTIMEDIA 443
send the corresponding phone number associated with
the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
NOTE:
• The first number encountered for that contact will be
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
ignored.
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the use
of this feature.
• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth. These
additional symbols will be ignored when dialing a
numbered sequence.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The Voice Command
button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “There are two numbers with the name John. Say
the full name” you could push the Voice Command
button and say, “John Smith” to select that option
without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Voice Response Length
It is possible for you to choose between Brief and Detailed
Voice Response Length.
1. Push the MORE button on the faceplate, then press the
“Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Display” button on the touchscreen, then
scroll down to Voice Response Length.
3. Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by pressing the box
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
indicate your selection.
Phone And Network Status Indicators
Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of
your phone and network status when you are attempting
to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone. The status is
given for network signal strength and phone battery
strength.
444 MULTIMEDIA
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone (while dialing via
the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise caution
and take precautionary safety measures). By dialing a
number with your connected Bluetooth mobile phone, the
audio will be played through your vehicle’s audio system.
The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the
number using a voice command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation,
after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that
the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect Phone, you will still be able
to hear the conversation coming from the other party, but
the other party will not be able to hear you. To mute the
Uconnect Phone simply press the “Mute” button on the
Phone main screen.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred
from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your
connected mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice
versa, press the “Transfer” button on the Phone main
screen.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect
Phone And Mobile Phone
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth
connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone
Voice Command
For best performance:
• Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½ inch
(1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped)
and the mirror.
10
MULTIMEDIA 445
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during
a Voice Command period.
Performance is maximized under:
• Low-to-medium blower setting
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed
• Low road noise
• Smooth road surface
• Fully closed windows
• Dry weather condition
NOTE:
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents,
the system may not always work for some.
• When navigating through an automated system such as
voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not
in motion is recommended.
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
in the Uconnect Phonebook.
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Local)
name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are
not similar.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must be
spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.”
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing num-
ber combinations may not be supported.
446 MULTIMEDIA
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
• Low-to-medium blower setting
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed
• Low road noise
• Smooth road surface
• Fully closed windows
• Dry weather conditions
• Operation from the driver’s seat
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not
the Uconnect Phone
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume
Bluetooth Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the connection can
generally be reestablished by switching the phone off/on.
Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth
ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON
or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait
at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
10
MULTIMEDIA 447
Voice Tree
Uconnect Hands-Free Calling
448 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
• You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send a
message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
which phone number you want to send a message to for
John Smith.
• You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
“Other.”
• You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing Calls”
or “Missed Calls.”
• Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect system
is equipped with this feature and the mobile phone
supports messaging over Bluetooth.
• You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone number
supported by your Mobile phone.
• You can replace “4” with any message number shown on
the screen.
• If your phone does not support phonebook download or
call log download over Bluetooth than these commands
will return a response that the contact does not exist in
the phonebook.
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
UCONNECT PHONE (UCONNECT 3/3 NAV)
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle
communications system. Uconnect Phone allows you to
dial a phone number with your mobile phone.
10
MULTIMEDIA 449
Uconnect Phone supports the following features:
Voice Activated Features:
• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mobile”
or, “Dial 248 555 1212”).
• Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming
SMS messages.
• Hands Free text messaging (“Send a message to John
Smith Mobile”).
• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
Back”).
• View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls,” “Show
Outgoing calls,” “Show missed Calls,” “Show Recent
Calls”).
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
• Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis-
played on the touchscreen.
• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
• Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS.
• Sending a text message via the touchscreen.
• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the
touchscreen.
• Pairing up to ten phones/audio devices for easy access
to connect to them quickly.
NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via
Bluetooth for messaging features to work properly. Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicles
audio system; the system will automatically mute your
radio when using the Uconnect Phone. For Uconnect
customer support, visit the following website:
• U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-
855-8400.
• Canadian residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
450 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only in
safe driving conditions following all applicable laws,
including laws regarding phone use. Your attention
should be focused on safely operating the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in an accident causing
serious injury or death.
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features
Bluetooth technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other with-
out wires or a docking station, so Uconnect Phone works
no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your
purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned
on and has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect Phone.
The Uconnect Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or
audio devices to be linked to the system. Only one linked
(or paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
Uconnect Phone Button
The Uconnect Phone
button is used to enter
the phone mode and make calls, show recent
incoming and outgoing calls, view phonebook
along with other features. When you push the
button you will hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to
give a command.
Uconnect Voice Command Button
The Uconnect Voice Command
button is
only used for “barge in” and when you are
already in a call and you want to send Tones or
make another call.
The Voice Command
button is also used to access the
Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command
features if your vehicle is equipped. Please see the
Uconnect Voice Command section for direction on how
to use the Voice Command
button.
10
MULTIMEDIA 451
The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicles
audio system. The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be
adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from
the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so
equipped.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two general methods
for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mo-
bile.”
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
guided through the available options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
prompt.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following com-
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith mobile.”
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound command form of the voice command is
given. You can also break the commands into parts and
say each part of the command when you are asked for it.
For example, you can use the compound command form
voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you can
break the compound command form into two voice
commands: “Search Contact” and when asked “John
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect Phone works
best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if
speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away
from you.
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Lan-
guage Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah” and
“eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I would
like to.”
452 MULTIMEDIA
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or
sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly Smith.”
For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the
system identifies the topic or context and provides the
associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do you want to
call?” in the case where a phone call was requested but the
specific name was not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pushing
the “Voice Command”
button on your steering wheel.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push the
Phone
button (if active) on your steering wheel and
say a command or say “help.” All Uconnect Phone
sessions begin with a push of the VR button or the
Phone
button (if active) on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also push the VR button
or Phone button
(if active) on your steering wheel when the system is
listening for a command and be returned to the main or
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair your
compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone.
NOTE:
• You must have Bluetooth enabled on your mobile phone
to complete this procedure.
• The vehicle must be in PARK.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect web-
site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
1. Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen to begin.
10
MULTIMEDIA 453
2. If there is no phone currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process. Then, search
for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile
phone. When prompted on the phone, enter the name
and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.
• If “No” is selected, press the “Settings” button from
the Uconnect Phone main screen.
• Press the “Add Device” button on the touchscreen.
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled
mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter the
name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.
• See step four to complete the process.
4. Uconnect Phone displays an in progress screen while
the system is connecting.
Mobile Phone Pairing
Mobile Phone Pairing Progress
454 MULTIMEDIA
5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system prompts you to choose whether or not this is
your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” makes this phone
the highest priority. This phone takes precedence over
other paired phones within range.
NOTE: Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect
system may interfere with the Bluetooth connection. If this
happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However, first,
make sure to delete the device from the list of phones on
your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove Uconnect
from the list of devices in your phone’s Bluetooth settings.
Pair Additional Mobile Phones
1. Press the “Settings” button from the Phone main screen.
2. Press the “Add Device” button on the touchscreen.
3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled
mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter the
name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.
4. Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while
the system is connecting.
5. When the pairing process has successfully been com-
pleted, the system will prompt you to choose whether or
not this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will
make this phone the highest priority. This phone will
take precedence over other paired phones within range.
NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which it was
paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher
priority.
You can also use the following VR commands to bring up
the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:
• “Show Paired Phones”
• “Connect My Phone”
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device
1. Press the “Player” button on the touchscreen to begin.
2. Change the Source to Bluetooth.
3. Press the “Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen to
display the Paired Audio Devices screen.
4. Press the “Add Device” button on the touchscreen.
10
MULTIMEDIA 455
NOTE: If there is no device currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled
audio device. When prompted on the device, enter the
PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while
the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully been com-
pleted, the system will prompt you to choose whether or
not this is your favorite device. Selecting “Yes” will
make this device the highest priority. This device will
take precedence over other paired devices within range.
NOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in which it was
paired. The latest device paired will have the higher
priority.
You can also use the following VR command to bring up a
list of paired audio devices:
• “Show Paired Phones”
• “Connect My Phone”
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio
Device After Pairing
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest
priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within range.
If you need to choose a particular phone or Audio Device
follow these steps:
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paired Audio Sources”
button on the touchscreen.
3. Press to select the particular Phone or the particular
Audio Device.
4. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paired Audio Devices”
button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
device name.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
456 MULTIMEDIA
5. Press the “Disconnect Device” button on the touch-
screen.
6. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Pair Phones” or “Paired Audio Devices”
button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
device name for a different Phone or Audio Device than
the currently connected device.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the “Delete Device” button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paired Audio Devices”
button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
device name.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the “Make Favorite” button on the touchscreen;
you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list.
6. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect
website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.
• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book,
follow the procedure in the Voice Recognition Quick
Reference section.
• Automatic download and update of a phone book, if
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless
phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone, for
example, after you start the vehicle.
• A maximum of 2,000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to
the Uconnect Phone.
10
MULTIMEDIA 457
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available,
the previously downloaded phonebook is available for
use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or de-
leted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be edited
on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connec-
tion.
Managing Your Favorite Phonebook
There are three ways you can add an entry to your Favorite
Phonebook.
1. During an active call of a number to make a favorite,
press and hold a favorite button on the top of the phone
main screen.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select Phonebook
from the Phone main screen, then select the appropriate
number. Press the “+” next to the selected number to
display the options pop-up. In the pop-up select “Add
to Favorites.”
NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
3. From the Phone main screen, select Phonebook. From
the Phonebook screen, select the “Favorites” button on
the touchscreen and then select the “+” button on the
touchscreen located to the right of the phonebook re-
cord. Select an empty entry and press the “+” on that
selected entry. When the Options pop-up appears, press
“Add from Mobile.” You will then be asked which
contact and number to choose from your mobile phone-
book. When complete the new favorite will be shown.
Phonebook Favorites
458 MULTIMEDIA
To Remove A Favorite
1. To remove a Favorite, select phonebook from the Phone
main screen.
2. Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and
then press the “+” Options button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the “+” next to the Favorite you would like to
remove.
4. The Options pop-up will display, press “Remove from
Favs.”
Emergency And Towing Assistance
The Emergency and Towing Assistance Favorite numbers
can only be altered. These cannot be deleted and the names
cannot be changed.
Add From Mobile
Remove From Favorites
10
MULTIMEDIA 459
To change the Emergency or Towing Assistance numbers
follow these steps.
1. Press the “Phonebook” button from the Phone main
screen.
2. Press the “Favorites” button on the touchscreen. Scroll
to the bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and
Towing Assistance Favorites.
3. Press the “+” Options button on the touchscreen.
4. Press the “+” next to appropriate Favorite that is to be
altered.
5. The Options pop-up will appear and you can choose
between Editing the number or resetting the number to
default.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available and sup-
ported by Bluetooth on your mobile service plan. For
example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way
calling, this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
Phone. Check with your mobile service provider for the
features that you have.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call
with Uconnect Phone.
• Redial
• Dial by pressing in the number
• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
• Favorites
• Mobile Phonebook
• Recent Call Log
Emergency And Breakdown Assistance
460 MULTIMEDIA
• SMS Message Viewer
Dial By Saying A Number
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial 248-555-1212.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number 248-555-1212.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
1. Push the “VR” button on your steering wheel to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Call John Doe Mobile.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
features:
• Answer
• End
• Ignore
• Hold/unhold
• Mute/unmute
• Transfer the call to/from the phone
• Swap two active calls
• Join two active calls together
Touch-Tone Number Entry
1. Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Dial” button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to enter
the number and press “Call.”
To send a touch-tone using Voice Recognition (VR), push
the Voice Command
button on your steering wheel
while in a call and say “Send 1234#” or you can say
“Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail password is
stored in your mobile phonebook.
10
MULTIMEDIA 461
Recent Calls
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
• Incoming Calls
• Outgoing Calls
• Missed Calls
• All Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the “recent calls” button
on the touchscreen on the Phone main screen.
You can also push the Phone
button and say “Show
my incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming
calls will be displayed.
You can also push the Phone
button and say “Show
my recent calls” from any screen and the All calls screen
will be displayed.
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing,”
“Recent” or “Missed.”
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system.
Push the Phone
button on the steering wheel to accept
the call. You can also press the “answer” button on the
touchscreen or press the caller ID box.
Recent Calls
462 MULTIMEDIA
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Push the Phone
button on the steering
wheel, or press the “answer” button on the touchscreen,
or caller ID box, to place the current call on hold and
answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
You can place a call on hold by pressing the “Hold” button
on the Phone main screen, then dial a number from the
dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks.
To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling Between
Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer to “Join
Calls” in this section.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
During an active call, press the “Hold” button on the
Phone main screen.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the “Swap” button on the Phone main screen. Only
one call can be placed on hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone
button to toggle between
the active and held phone call.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the “Join Calls” button on the Phone main
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily push the Phone
button or press the “end” button on the touchscreen.
Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is
a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
10
MULTIMEDIA 463
Redial
Press the “Redial” button on the touchscreen, or push the
“VR” button and after the “Listening” prompt and the
following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was
dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
switched to OFF.
NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range for the
Bluetooth connection. It is recommended to press the
“transfer” button on the touchscreen when leaving the
vehicle.
Uconnect Phone Features
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial Emergency” and the Uconnect Phone will
instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency
number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada,
and Mexico.
NOTE:
• The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the
touchscreen.
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
• The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of
successfully making a phone call as to that for the
mobile phone directly.
464 MULTIMEDIA
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations, when the mobile phone has
network coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect
Phone.
Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
If you need roadside/towing assistance:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Roadside Assistance” or say “Towing Assistance.”
NOTE: The roadside/towing assistance number dialed is
based on the country where the vehicle is purchased
(1-800-521-2779 for the U.S., 1-800-363-4869 for Canada,
55-14-3454 for Mexico City, and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the FCA US LLC
24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage details in the
Warranty Information Booklet.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems.”
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to push numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service or
automated customer service line. Some services require
immediate response selection. In some instances, that may
be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on
your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the touchscreen
or push the Voice Command
button and say the word
“Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For ex-
ample, if required to enter your PIN followed with a
pound, (3746#),youcanpush the Voice Command
button and say, “Send3746#.”Saying “Send”
followed by a number, or sequence of numbers, is also
to be used for navigating through an automated cus-
tomer service center menu structure, and to leave a
number on a pager.
10
MULTIMEDIA 465
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phone-
book entry with First and/or Last Name as “Voicemail
Password”, then if you push the Voice Command
but-
ton and say “Send Voicemail Password” the Uconnect
Phone will then send the corresponding phone number
associated with the phonebook entry, as tones over the
phone.
NOTE:
• The first number encountered for that contact will be
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
ignored.
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the use
of this feature.
• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth. These
additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing a
numbered sequence.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The Voice Command
button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “There are two numbers with the name John. Say
the full name” you could push the Voice Command
button and say, “John Smith” to select that option
without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Voice Response Length
It is possible for you to choose between Brief and Detailed
Voice Response Length.
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, then scroll
down to Voice Response Length.
3. Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by pressing the box
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
indicate your selection.
Phone And Network Status Indicators
Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of
your phone and network status when you are attempting
466 MULTIMEDIA
to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone. The status is
given for network signal strength and phone battery
strength.
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone (while dialing via
the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise caution
and take precautionary safety measures). By dialing a
number with your connected Bluetooth mobile phone, the
audio will be played through your vehicle’s audio system.
The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the
number using a voice command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation,
after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that
the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect Phone, you will still be able
to hear the conversation coming from the other party, but
the other party will not be able to hear you. To mute the
Uconnect Phone simply press the “Mute” button on the
Phone main screen.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred
from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your
connected mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice
versa, press the “Transfer” button on the Phone main
screen.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect
Phone And Mobile Phone
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth
connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
10
MULTIMEDIA 467
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone
Voice Command
For the best performance:
• Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½ inch (1
cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped) and
the mirror.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
• Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during a
voice command period.
Performance is maximized under:
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
• Low Road Noise
• Smooth Road Surface
• Fully Closed Windows
• Dry Weather Condition
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel.
You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect features and appli-
cations in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is
safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
468 MULTIMEDIA
Even though the system is designed for many languages
and accents, the system may not always work for some.
NOTE: It is recommended that you do not store names in
your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition rate is
optimized when the entries are not similar. You can say
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most number com-
binations is supported, some shortcut dialing number
combinations may not be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
• Low Road Noise
• Smooth Road Surface
• Fully Closed Windows
• Dry Weather Conditions
• Operation From The Driver’s Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to a
large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the
Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
10
MULTIMEDIA 469
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your
phone.
Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth to use this
feature. If the Uconnect Phone determines your phone is
not compatible with SMS messaging over Bluetooth the
“Messaging” button will be grayed out and the feature will
not be available for use.
NOTE: Uconnect Phone SMS is only available when the
vehicle is not moving.
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect Phone, an announcement will be
made to notify you that you have a new text message.
Voice Text List
Voice Text Reply
470 MULTIMEDIA
Once a message is received and viewed or listened to, you
will have the following options:
• Send a Reply
• Forward
• Call
Send Messages Using Buttons On The Touchscreen:
You can send messages using Uconnect Phone. To send a
new message:
1. Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “messaging” button on the touchscreen then
“New Message.”
3. Press one of the 18 preset messages and the person you
wish to send the message to.
4. If multiple numbers are available for the contact select
which number you would like to have the message sent.
5. Press “Send” or “Cancel.”
Preset Message List
10
MULTIMEDIA 471
Send Messages Using Voice Commands:
1. Push the Phone
button.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Send message to John Smith mobile.”
3. After the system prompts you for what message you
want to send, say the message you wish to send or say
“List.” There are 18 preset messages.
While the list of defined messages are being read, you can
interrupt the system by pushing the Voice Command
button and saying the message you want to send.
After the system confirms that you want to send your
message to John Smith, your message will be sent.
Preset Message List
472 MULTIMEDIA
List of Preset Messages:
1. Yes.
2. No.
3. Okay.
4. I can’t talk right now.
5. Call me.
6. I’ll call you later.
7. I’m on my way.
8. Thanks.
9. I’ll be late.
10. I will be <number> minutes late.
11. See you in <number> minutes.
12. Stuck in traffic.
13. Start without me.
14. Where are you?
15. Are you there yet?
16. I need directions.
17. I’m lost.
18. See you later.
Bluetooth Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the connection can
generally be re-established by switching the mobile phone
OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON
or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait
at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
10
MULTIMEDIA 473
Voice Tree
Uconnect Hands-Free Calling
474 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
a message to John Smith,” and the system will ask you
which phone number you want to send a message to for
John Smith.
2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
“Other.”
3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
4. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone number
supported by your Mobile phone.
5. These commands can be used during a phone call after
pushing the Uconnect Voice Command button on the
steering wheel. Please note the call will be muted while
the VR session is active.
6. Send dial tones for automated systems is available while
a call is active. This is an example that uses a Phonebook
Record named “Voicemail Password.”
7. Storing Dial tones in contact names is possible but only
the first number encountered in a contact name will be
sent. For example, if there is a number stored in the
Home and Work numbers for the contact “Voicemail
password,” only the Home number will be sent.
8. If your phone does not support phonebook download or
call log download over Bluetooth, then these commands
will return a response that the contact does not exist in
the phonebook.
9. Emergency and Towing assistance are contacts that have
been pre-loaded in the phonebook. Commands such as
“Call Emergency” and “Call Towing Assistance” will
call the corresponding number stored with those con-
tacts.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face
and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
10
MULTIMEDIA 475
Uconnect Text Messaging
476 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
which phone number you want to send a message to for
John Smith.
2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
“Other.”
3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
4. Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect system
is equipped with this feature and the mobile phone
supports messaging over Bluetooth.
5. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone number
supported by your Mobile phone.
6. You can replace “4” with any message number shown
on the screen.
7. If your phone does not support phonebook download or
call log download over Bluetooth then these commands
will return a response that the contact does not exist in
the phonebook.
10
MULTIMEDIA 477
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face
and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
Uconnect Voice Command
478 MULTIMEDIA
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2.
This device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the an-
tenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation when not
using Uconnect (if equipped).
10
MULTIMEDIA 479
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommen-
dations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific com-
munity.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wire-
less devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
before turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
480 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence in a residential installation. This equipment gener-
ates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-
tions, may cause harmful interference to radio commu-
nications. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
ence will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
1. Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
2. Consult an authorized dealer or an experienced radio
technician for help.
VOICE COMMAND (UCONNECT 3/3 NAV)
Uconnect 3/3 NAV
The Uconnect Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio,
disc player, SD Card, USB/iPod and SiriusXM
Travel Link.
The Uconnect Voice Command system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, disc player, SD Card,
USB/iPod.
NOTE:
Take care to speak into the Voice Command system
as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the Voice
Command system to recognize user voice commands may be
negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only in
safe driving conditions following all applicable laws,
including laws regarding phone use. Your attention
should be focused on safely operating the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a collision causing
serious injury or death.
10
MULTIMEDIA 481
When you push the Uconnect Voice Command button,
you hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command.
If no command is spoken the system says one of two
responses:
• I didn’t understand
• I didn’t get that, etc.
If a command is not spoken a second time, the system will
respond with an error and give some direction as what can
be said based on the context you are in. After three
consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR session
will end.
Pushing the Uconnect Voice Command
button while
the system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The
system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can say
a command. This becomes helpful once you start to learn
the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel” or
“Help.”
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at a
normal speaking volume.
The system best recognizes your speech if the windows are
closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear available commands, push the Uconnect Voice
Command
button and say “Help.” You hear available
commands for the screen displayed.
Natural Speech
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah” and
“eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I would
like to.”
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or
sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly Smith.”
For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the
system identifies the topic or context and provides the
482 MULTIMEDIA
associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do you want to
call?” in the case where a phone call was requested but the
specific name was not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pressing
the Uconnect Voice Command
button.
Uconnect Voice Commands
The Uconnect Voice Command system understands two
types of commands. Universal commands are available at
all times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
Start a dialogue by pushing the Uconnect Voice Command
button.
Changing The Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
but-
ton.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com-
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume set-
ting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
Starting Voice Recognition (VR) Session In
Radio/Player Modes
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
NOTE: The commands can be said on any screen when a
call is not active after pushing the Uconnect Voice Com-
mand
button.
Source
To switch to the audio source, say “Change source to Disc”
for example. This command can be given in any mode or
screen:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
10
MULTIMEDIA 483
Voice Tree
Uconnect Voice Commands - AM/FM/Satellite
484 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
• You can replace “950 AM” with any other AM or FM
frequency, such as “98.7 FM.”
• You can replace “80’s on 8” with any other station name
received by the radio.
• You can replace “8” with any other channel number
received by the radio.
• You can replace “rock” with any of the music types.
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
shaded grey.
10
MULTIMEDIA 485
Uconnect Hands-Free Music Control
486 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
• You can replace the album, artist, song, genre, playlist,
podcast and audio book names with any corresponding
names on the current device that is playing.
• You can replace “8” with any track on the CD that is
currently playing. Command is only available when CD
is playing.
• Playlist, Podcast and audio book commands are only
available when the iPod is connected and playing.
• VR commands, Albums, Artists, and Genre names are
based on the music metadata contained on the loaded/
connected device.
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
shaded grey.
10
MULTIMEDIA 487
Uconnect Voice Command - Travel Link
488 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
• You can replace “NFL” with any league shown on the
sports league screen. For example you can say “Show
MLB headlines” or “Show PGA headlines.”
• You can replace “Headlines” with any menu items
shown on a league screen. For example you can say
“Show NFL Schedule and results” or “Show NCAA
Basketball AP top 25” or “Show Major League Baseball
Teams.”
• You can also say “Show Current Weather” or “Show
extended weather” or “Show five day forecast” or
“Show ski info” to get other forecasts.
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
shaded grey.
10
MULTIMEDIA 489
Uconnect Voice Command - Non-Phone
490 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
• Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles.
• You can replace “Player” with “Radio,” “Navigation,”
“Phone,” “Climate,” “More” or “Settings.”
• Navigation commands only work if equipped with
Navigation.
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
shaded grey.
10
MULTIMEDIA 491
Uconnect Voice Command - Navigation
492 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
• You can also say “Find City,” “Find Favorite,” “Find
Play by Category,” “Find Play by Name,” “Find Re-
cently Found,” “Where to?” or “Go Home.”
• You can say “Find Nearest” then “Restaurant,” “Fuel,”
“Transit,” “Lodging,” “Shopping,” “Bank,” “Entertain-
ment,” “Recreation,” “Attractions,” “Community,”
“Auto Services,” “Hospitals,” “Parking,” “Airport,”
“Police Stations,” “Fire Stations,” or “Auto Dealers.”
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
shaded grey.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
• Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
• If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
• Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching
the disc.
• Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
• Store the disc in its case after playing.
• Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
• Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc), oversized, or
have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
10
MULTIMEDIA 493
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ........................496
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ..............496
▫ Prepare A List .........................496
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ..............496
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................496
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center .............497
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........497
▫ In Mexico Contact ......................497
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands..........497
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) ....................497
▫ Service Contract .......................498
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION ...............499
䡵 MOPARPARTS .........................499
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS .............499
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .499
▫ In Canada ............................499
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .............500
11
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
496 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423-6343
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 423-6343
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunica-
tion Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 497
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu-
facturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufac-
turer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufactur-
er’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-
521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract
that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manufac-
turer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract
that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and you require
service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and
contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment when
you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also
made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership
experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to
resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
498 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail-
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 499
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and fea-
tures. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driv-
ability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com (U.S.)
500 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
12
About Your Brakes ......................234, 373
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .............333
Adding Fuel ..............................257
Adding Washing Fluid.......................320
Additives, Fuel ............................375
Adjust
Down .................................49
Forward ................................49
Rearward ...............................49
Up....................................49
AirBag .................................190
Air Bag Operation ........................192
Air Bag Warning Light .....................189
Driver Knee Air Bag ......................193
Enhanced Accident Response .............198, 309
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................309
If Deployment Occurs .....................197
Knee Impact Bolsters ......................192
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .............200
Maintenance ............................200
Side Air Bags ...........................193
Transporting Pets ........................222
Air Bag Light.......................146, 189, 224
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)......324
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..................325
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ................325, 326
Air Conditioner System ......................325
Air Conditioning............................98
Rear ..................................79
Air Conditioning Filter.......................101
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ................99
Air Filter ................................324
Air Pressure
Tires..................................352
Alarm
Panic ..................................19
Security Alarm........................29, 147
All Wheel Drive (AWD) ......................245
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle .................................5
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................332,
381
Disposal ...............................334
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................160
Anti-Lock Warning Light .....................153
Audio Systems (Radio).......................387
Auto Down Power Windows ..................102
Automatic Climate Controls ....................86
Automatic Dimming Mirror ....................58
Automatic Door Locks........................32
Automatic Headlights ........................64
502 INDEX
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..........86, 99
Automatic Transmission ..................236, 340
Adding Fluid .................338, 339, 340, 384
Fluid And Filter Change ...................340
Fluid Change ...........................340
Fluid Level Check .................337, 338, 339
Fluid Type .............................384
Special Additives .........................337
Autostick ................................241
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .........126
Back-Up Lights ............................282
Battery...............................148, 321
Charging System Light ....................148
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ................20
Location ...............................321
Belts, Seat ................................223
Bluetooth
Phone ................435, 436, 453, 455, 467, 473
Body Mechanism Lubrication ..................327
B-Pillar Location ...........................347
Brake Assist System .........................161
Brake Control System, Electronic................161
Brake Fluid ...............................384
Brake, Parking.............................234
Brakes ..................................373
Brake System ..........................336, 373
Fluid Check .........................336, 384
Master Cylinder .........................336
Parking ...............................234
Warning Light ...........................146
Brake/Transmission Interlock ..................237
Brightness, Interior Lights .....................68
Bulb Replacement ..........................278
Bulbs, Light ...........................226, 278
Camera, Rear .............................255
Capacities, Fluid ...........................381
Caps,
Filler
Oil (Engine) .........................318, 323
Power Steering ..........................245
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .................334
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................223, 378
Cargo
Vehicle Loading ......................110,259
Cargo Area Cover .......................110,111
Cargo Compartment ........................110
Luggage Carrier .........................131
Cargo Load Floor ..........................110
Cargo Management System ...................110
12
INDEX 503
Rollaway Tonneau Cover ...................111
Tri-Fold Load Floor .......................110
Cargo Tie-Downs...........................112
Car Washes...............................367
Cellular Phone ............................479
Certification Label ..........................259
Chains, Tire ..............................362
Changing A Flat Tire ........................341
Chart, Tire Sizing...........................343
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .156
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............222
Checks, Safety.............................222
Child Restraint ............................201
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ............................207
Child Seat Installation .....................218
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ........215
Infant And Child Restraints .................203
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............211
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......209
Older Children And Child Restraints ...........204
Seating Positions .........................208
Using The Top Tether Anchorage .............220
Clean Air Gasoline .........................375
Cleaning
Wheels ................................361
Climate Control ............................73
Automatic ..............................86
Manual ................................73
Rear ................................79, 92
Coin Holder ..............................122
Cold Weather Operation......................231
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance................493
Compact Spare Tire .........................359
Console
Floor .................................122
Contract, Service ...........................498
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............334
Cooling System ............................331
Adding
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................333
Coolant Level ........................331, 334
Cooling Capacity .........................381
Disposal Of Used Coolant ..................334
Drain, Flush, And Refill ....................332
Inspection ..............................334
Points To Remember ......................335
Pressure Cap ............................334
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......332, 381, 382
Corrosion Protection ........................366
504 INDEX
Cruise Light ..............................154
Cupholders ...........................124, 370
Customer Assistance ........................496
Customer Programmable Features...............388
Cybersecurity .............................387
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights...............68
Daytime Running Lights ......................64
Dealer Service .............................322
Defroster, Windshield........................224
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ....................70
Diagnostic System, Onboard...................155
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ............................63, 64
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission ................338, 339
Oil (Engine) ............................320
Power Steering ..........................245
Disabled Vehicle Towing .....................306
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................334
Door Ajar.............................149, 150
Door Ajar Light ........................149, 150
Door Locks
Automatic ..............................32
Doors....................................31
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ........................39
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water .................................274
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System).........415
E-85 Fuel ................................378
Electric Brake Control System
Anti-Lock Brake System ....................160
Electronic Roll Mitigation ...................167
Electric Remote Mirrors .......................61
Electronic Brake Control System ................161
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...............163
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........149
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck .................305
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................278
Jacking ............................290, 341
Jump
Starting ...........................300
Towing ................................306
Emission Control System Maintenance............156
Engine ..................................318
Air Cleaner .............................324
Block Heater ............................232
12
INDEX 505
Break-In Recommendations .................233
Checking Oil Level .......................320
Compartment ........................318, 319
Compartment Identification .................319
Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................331, 382
Cooling ...............................331
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................223, 378
Fails To Start ............................232
Flooded, Starting .........................232
Fuel Requirements ........................375
Jump Starting ...........................300
Oil ............................322, 381, 382
Oil Filler Cap ........................318, 323
Oil Filter ...............................324
Oil Reset ..............................139
Oil Selection .........................322, 381
Oil Synthetic ............................324
Overheating ............................303
Starting ............................229, 230
Engine Oil Viscosity.........................323
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ....................323
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .........198, 309
Ethanol ..............................376, 378
Exhaust Gas Cautions ....................223, 378
Exhaust System ........................223, 329
Exterior Lights .......................63, 64, 226
Filters
Air Cleaner .............................324
Air Conditioning .........................101
Engine Oil ..........................324, 382
Engine Oil Disposal .......................324
Flashers .................................278
Hazard Warning .........................278
Turn Signals ......................66, 154, 226
Flash-To-Pass ..............................64
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cr
uising Range ..........................380
Engine Oil .............................380
Fuel Requirements ....................378, 379
Maintenance ............................380
Replacement Parts ........................380
Starting ...............................380
Flooded Engine Starting ......................232
Floor Console .............................122
Fluid, Brake ..............................384
Fluid Capacities............................381
Fluid Leaks...............................226
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ................338, 339
506 INDEX
Brake ..............................336, 384
Cooling System ..........................331
Engine Oil .............................320
Power Steering .......................245, 384
Fluids And Lubricants .......................382
Fog Lights .............................66, 281
Fog Lights, Service .........................281
Fold-Flat Seats .............................39
Folding Rear Seats ........................42, 47
Four-Way Hazard Flasher.....................278
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ......................305
Fuel ....................................375
Additives ..............................375
Clean Air ..............................375
Ethanol ............................376, 378
Flexible ...............................378
Gasoline ...............................375
Materials Added .........................375
Methanol ..............................376
Octane Rating ........................375, 382
Requirements ...........................375
Specifications ...........................382
Tank Capacity ...........................381
Fueling..................................257
Fuses ...................................283
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ...............113
Gasoline, Clean Air .........................375
Gasoline, Reformulated ......................375
Gear Ranges ..............................238
Gear Selector Override.......................304
General Information.........................449
Glass Cleaning ............................370
Gross Axle Weight Rating .................259, 261
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...............259, 260
GVWR ..................................259
Hazar
d
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water ..........................274
Hazard Warning Flashers .....................278
Headlights
Automatic ..............................64
Bulb Replacement ........................280
Cleaning ...............................367
Delay ..................................65
High Beam .............................280
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...........64
Lights On Reminder .......................65
12
INDEX 507
On With Wipers ..........................65
Passing ................................64
Switch .................................64
Time Delay ..............................65
Head Restraints ............................52
Heated Mirrors .............................61
Heated Seats...............................50
Heater, Engine Block ........................232
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch ......64
Hitches
Trailer Towing ...........................263
Holder, Coin ..............................122
Holder, Cup ..............................124
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ...............113
Hood Prop ...............................107
Hood Release .............................107
Ignition ..................................22
Switch .................................22
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ......................27
Inside Rearview Mirror .......................58
Instrument Cluster..........................137
Descriptions ............................154
Display ............................138, 140
Engine Oil Reset .........................139
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................369
Interior Appearance Care .....................368
Interior Fuses .............................283
Interior Lights..............................67
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers)...............70
Introduction ................................4
Inverter
Power ................................130
iPod/USB/MP3 Control......................415
Jacking Instructions .........................293
Jack Location .............................290
Jack Operation .........................293, 341
Jump Starting .............................300
Key Fob
Panic Alarm .............................19
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........21, 28
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .....20
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ......21
Key-In Reminder............................
24
Keyless Enter-N-Go ......................33, 231
Passive Entry ............................33
Passive Entry Programming ..................33
Keys ....................................17
508 INDEX
Replacement .............................28
Sentry (Immobilizer) .......................27
Lane Change And Turn Signals .................66
Lane Change Assist ..........................66
Lap/Shoulder Belts .........................177
Latches..................................226
Hood .................................107
Lead Free Gasoline .........................375
Leaks, Fluid ..............................226
Life Of Tires ..............................355
Liftgate..................................109
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer .................71
Light Bulbs ...........................226, 278
Lights ................................67, 226
AirBag.........................146, 189, 224
Automatic Headlights ......................64
Back-Up ...............................282
Brake Assist Warning ......................165
Brake Warning ..........................146
Bulb Replacement ........................278
Cruise ................................154
Daytime Running .........................64
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...................64
Electronic Stability Program(ESP) Indicator ......148
Exterior .............................63, 226
Fog................................66, 281
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................278
Headlights ...........................64, 280
Headlights On With Wipers ..................65
Headlight Switch .........................64
High Beam ..........................64, 280
High Beam/Low Beam Select .................64
Instrument Cluster ........................64
Intensity Control ..........................68
Interior ................................67
License ................................282
Lights On Reminder .......................65
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........150
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) .............68
Park ..............................153, 280
Passing ................................
64
Rear Servicing ...........................282
Rear Tail Lamps .........................282
Seat Belt Reminder .......................146
Security Alarm ..........................147
Service ................................278
Side Marker ............................280
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .............168
Traction Control .........................165
12
INDEX 509
Turn Signals .............63, 66, 154, 226, 280, 282
Vanity Mirror ............................63
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . .148, 154
Load Floor, Cargo ..........................110
Loading Vehicle ........................259, 260
Capacities ..............................260
Tires..................................347
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .................143
Load Shed Battery Saver On...................143
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction.............143
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor .............143
Locks
Automatic Door ..........................32
Auto Unlock .............................32
Child Protection ..........................37
Power Door .............................32
Low Tire Pressure System.....................168
Lubrication, Body ..........................327
Luggage Carrier ...........................131
Lug Nuts/Bolts ............................373
Maintenance ..............................107
Maintenance Free Battery .....................321
Making A Phone Call .................439, 460, 461
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .150, 156
Manual
Service ................................500
Manual Transmission
Fluid Level Check ........................340
Marker Lights, Side .........................280
Master Cylinder
Brakes ................................336
Methanol ................................376
Mirrors ................................58, 60
Automatic Dimming .......................58
Electric Powered ..........................61
Electric Remote ...........................61
Exterior Folding ..........................60
Heated .................................61
Outside ................................59
Rearview ...............................58
Vanity .................................63
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle .................................5
Monitor, Tire Pressure System..................168
Mopar
Parts ..............................499
MP3 Control ..............................415
Multi-Function Control Lever ...................63
510 INDEX
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................233
Occupant Restraints.........................174
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............375, 382
Oil, Engine............................322, 382
Capacity ...............................381
Change Interval .........................322
Checking ..............................320
Dipstick ...............................320
Disposal ...............................324
Filter ..............................324, 382
Filter Disposal ...........................324
Identification Logo .......................323
Materials Added To .......................324
Pressure Warning Light ....................149
Recommendation .....................322, 381
Synthetic ..............................324
Viscosity ...........................323, 381
Oil Filter, Change ..........................324
Oil Filter, Selection..........................324
Oil Pressure Light ..........................149
Oil Reset.................................139
Onboard Diagnostic System ...................155
Operating Precautions .......................155
Operator Manual
Owner’s Manual .......................5,500
Outlet
Power ................................126
Outside Rearview Mirrors .....................59
Overheating, Engine ........................303
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual)...............5
Paint Care................................366
Panic Alarm ...............................19
Parking Brake .............................234
ParkSense System, Rear ......................249
Passenger Seat
Easy Entry ..............................44
Passive Entry ..............................33
Pets ....................................222
Phone
Bluetooth ...........................435,
436
Pairing .............................435, 453
Phonebook .....................437, 439, 457, 461
Phone (Uconnect) .......................431, 449
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ...........347
Power
Brakes ................................373
Distribution Center (Fuses) ..................286
12
INDEX 511
Door Locks ..............................32
Inverter ...............................130
Mirrors ................................61
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ............126
Seats ..................................48
Steering ............................244, 245
Sunroof ...............................105
Transfer Unit ........................340, 384
Windows ..............................102
Power Seats
Down .................................49
Forward ................................49
Rearward ...............................49
Up....................................49
Power Steering Fluid ........................384
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ................183
Preparation For Jacking ......................292
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................183
Radial Ply Tires ............................353
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap).............334
Radio Frequency
General Information ................21, 27, 28, 36
Radio Operation ...........................479
Radio Remote Controls ......................414
Rear Air Conditioning .....................79, 92
Rear Axle (Differential) ......................340
Rear Camera ..............................255
Rear Cupholders ...........................124
Rear Drive Assembly ........................340
Rear ParkSense System ......................249
Rear Seats, Folding........................42, 47
Rear Wiper/Washer..........................71
Reclining Front Seats .........................41
Reclining Rear Seats .........................43
Recreational Towing.........................272
Reformulated Gasoline.......................375
Refrigerant ...............................326
Release, Hood .............................107
Reminder, Lights On .........................65
Reminder
, Seat Belt .........................176
Remote Keyless Entry ........................18
Panic Alarm .............................19
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........21, 28
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ...........414
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .....................26
Uconnect Settings .........................26
Replacement Bulbs .........................278
512 INDEX
Replacement Keys ...........................28
Replacement Tires ..........................356
Reporting Safety Defects .....................499
Restraints, Child ...........................201
Restraints, Head ............................52
Retractable Cargo Area Cover ..................111
Reverse Lights.............................282
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck...................305
Roof Luggage Rack .........................131
Rotation, Tires.............................363
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...................223
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................226
Safety Defects, Reporting .....................499
Safety, Exhaust Gas .........................223
Safety Information, Tire ......................341
Safety Tips ...............................222
Seat Belt Reminder .........................146
Seat Belts .............................176, 223
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................181
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........181
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......181
Child Restraints .........................201
Extender ...............................182
Front Seat .......................176, 177, 179
Inspection ..............................223
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................179
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................177
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............181
Operating Instructions .....................179
Pregnant Women .........................183
Pretensioners ...........................183
Rear Seat ..............................177
Reminder ..............................176
Seat Belt Extender ........................182
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................183
Untwisting
Procedure .....................181
Seat Belts Maintenance.......................368
Seats..................................39, 49
Adjustment ........................39, 42, 49
Heated .................................50
Height Adjustment ......................41, 48
Power .................................48
Rear Folding ........................39, 42, 47
Reclining ...............................41
Reclining Rear ...........................43
Seatback Release .....................39, 42, 47
Tilting ...............................39, 48
Security Alarm ..........................29, 147
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............382
12
INDEX 513
Sentry Key
Key Programming .........................28
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ......................27
Sentry Key Replacement ......................28
Service Assistance ..........................496
Service Contract ...........................498
Service Manuals ...........................500
Settings
Personal ...............................388
Shift Lever Override ........................304
Shoulder Belts.............................177
Signals, Turn.....................66, 154, 226, 282
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ....................362
Snow Tires ...............................358
Spare Tires .....................290, 358, 359, 360
Spark Plugs ..............................382
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ..........................382
Oil...................................382
Speed Control
Cancel ................................249
Resume ...............................249
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .................246
Starting ..............................229, 230
Automatic Transmission ....................229
Button .................................22
Cold Weather ...........................231
Engine Fails To Start ......................232
Starting And Operating ...................229, 230
Starting Procedures ......................229, 230
Steering ..................................56
Column Controls .........................63
Power .............................244, 245
Tilt Column .............................56
Wheel, Heated ...........................57
Wheel, Tilt ..............................56
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................414
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .414
Storage ..................................120
Storage, Vehicle ............................100
Stuck, Freeing .............................305
Sunglasses
Storage..........................131
Sun Roof .............................105, 107
Sun Visor Extension .........................63
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag..........190
Sway Control, Trailer ........................262
Synthetic Engine Oil ........................324
Taillights.................................282
Telescoping Steering Column ...................56
514 INDEX
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ......................112
Tilt Steering Column .........................56
Time Delay
Headlight ...............................65
Tire And Loading Information Placard............347
Tire Markings .............................341
Tires ......................226, 351, 358, 359, 365
Aging (Life Of Tires) ......................355
Air Pressure ............................351
Chains ................................362
Changing ...........................290, 341
Compact Spare ..........................359
General Information ................351, 358, 359
High Speed .............................353
Inflation Pressure ........................352
Jacking ................................341
Life Of Tires ............................355
Load Capacity .......................347, 348
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ........151, 168
Quality Grading .........................365
Radial ................................353
Replacement ............................356
Rotation ...............................363
Safety .............................341, 351
Sizes .................................343
Snow Tires .............................358
Spare Tires ...................290, 358, 359, 360
Spinning ...............................354
Trailer Towing ...........................267
Tread Wear Indicators .....................355
Wheel Nut Torque ........................373
Tire Safety Information.......................341
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .................265
To Open Hood ............................107
Towing ..................................260
Disabled Vehicle .........................306
Guide .................................264
Recr
eational ............................272
Weight ................................264
Towing Behind A Motorhome ..................272
Traction .................................273
Traction Control ...........................167
Trailer Towing.............................260
Cooling System Tips ......................271
Hitches ................................263
Minimum Requirements ....................266
Tips ..................................270
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..................265
Wiring ................................268
Trailer Towing Guide ........................264
12
INDEX 515
Trailer Weight .............................264
Transaxle
Autostick ..............................241
Transmission
Automatic ..........................236, 337
Fluid .................................337
Maintenance ............................337
Transporting Pets ..........................222
Tread Wear Indicators .......................355
Trip Computer ............................142
Turn Signals ........................66, 154, 282
Uconnect
Advanced Phone Connectivity ............445, 467
Phone Call Features .............438, 442, 460, 464
Uconnect Settings ...................19, 26, 388
Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone)
Making A Phone Call ..................439, 461
Uconnect Phone ........................431, 449
Making A Call ...........................460
Pairing ................................453
Receiving A Call .........................462
Uconnect Voice Command ....................481
Underhood Fuses ..........................286
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..................365
Unleaded Gasoline .........................375
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................181
USB....................................415
Vanity Mirrors .............................63
Vehicle Certification Label ....................259
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............372
Vehicle Loading .....................259, 260, 348
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.................5
Vehicle Storage ............................100
Video Entertainment System...................415
Viscosity, Engine Oil ........................323
Voice Command ........................468, 481
Warning Flashers, Hazard ....................278
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions). . . .151
W
arnings And Cautions .......................5
Warranty Information .......................499
Washer
Adding Fluid ...........................320
Washers, Windshield ...................68, 70, 320
Washing Vehicle ...........................367
Water
Driving Through .........................274
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...................361
516 INDEX
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ...................361
Wind Buffeting .........................104, 106
Window Fogging...........................100
Windows ................................102
Power ................................102
Reset Auto-Up ..........................103
Windshield Defroster ........................224
Windshield Washers .......................68, 70
Fluid .................................320
Windshield Wiper Blades .....................327
Windshield Wipers ..........................68
Wipers Blade Replacement ....................327
Wipers, Intermittent .........................70
Wipers, Rear...............................71
Wrecker Towing ...........................306
12
INDEX 517
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
WARNING:
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
First Edition
Printed in the U.S.A.
19JC-126-AA
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
